INSTRUCTION MANUAL

NON-PRISM TOTAL STATION

GPT-3200N/NW SERIES

64555 90430 [TF]

 FOREWORD

Thank you for purchasing the TOPCON Non-Prism Total Station, GPT-3200N/NW
series.
For the best performance of the instruments, please carefully read these instructions
and keep them in a convenient location for future reference.

1
General Handling Precautions

Before starting work or operation, be sure to check that the instrument is

functioning correctly with normal performance.

Do not submerge the instrument into water.

The instrument can not be submerged underwater.
The instrument is designed based on the International Standard IP66, therefore it is
protected from the normal rainfall.
Setting the instrument on a tripod
When mounting the instrument on a tripod, use a wooden tripod when possible. The
vibrations that may occur when using a metallic tripod can effect the measuring precision.
Installing the tribrach
If the tribrach is installed incorrectly, the measuring precision could be effected.
Occasionally check the adjusting screws on the tribrach. Make sure the base fixing lever is
locked and the base fixing screws are tightened.
Guarding the instrument against shocks
When transporting the instrument, provide some protection to minimize risk of shocks.
Heavy shocks may cause the measurement to be faulty.
Carrying the instrument
Always carry the instrument by its handgrip.
Exposing the instrument to extreme heat.
Do not leave the instrument in extreme heat for longer than necessary. It could adversely
affect its performance.
Sudden changes of temperature
Any sudden change of temperature to the instrument or prism may result in a reduction of
measuring distance range, i.e when taking the instrument out from a heated vehicle. Let
instrument acclimate itself to ambient temperature.
Battery level check
Confirm battery level remaining before operating.
Taking the battery out
It is recommended not to take the battery out during the power is on. All the data stored is
possible gone at that time. So please do your assembling or taking the battery out after the
power is off.
Do not hold the lower part of display unit
When you take out the instrument from a carrying case, or keep into the case, please hold
the hand grip and base of the instrument. Please do not hold the lower part of the display
unit.
External power source
Use only recommended batteries or external power source. Use of batteries or an external
power source not recommended by us may result in equipment failure.
(For further information see the chapter 'BATTERY SYSTEM.')

Noise from the inside of instrument

When EDM turns on, the sound of motors from inside the instrument body may be
heard. This is normal and does not effect operation of the instrument.

2
Display for Safe Use
In order to encourage the safe use of products and prevent any danger to the operator and others or
damage to properties, important warnings are put on the products and inserted in the instruction
manuals.
We suggest that everyone understand the meaning of the following displays and icons before reading
the “Safety Cautions” and text.

Display Meaning
Ignoring or disregard of this display may lead to the danger of death or
WARNING
serious injury.
Ignoring or disregard of this display may lead to personal injury or phys-
CAUTION
ical damage.
• Injury refers to hurt, burn, electric shock, etc.
• Physical damage refers to extensive damage to buildings or equipment and furniture.

Safety Cautions

WARNING
• There is a risk of fire, electric shock or physical harm if you attempt to disassemble or repair
the instrument yourself.
This is only to be carried out by TOPCON or an authorized dealer, only!

• Cause eye injury or blindness.

Do not look at the sun through a telescope.

• Laser beams can be dangerous, and can cause eye injury's if used incorrectly.
Never attempt to repair the instrument yourself.

• Cause eye injury or blindness.

Do not stare into beam.

• High temperature may cause fire.

Do not cover the charger while it is charging.

• Risk of fire or electric shock.

Do not use damaged power cable, plug and socket.

• Risk of fire or electric shock.

Do not use a wet battery or charger.

• May ignite explosively.

Never use an instrument near flammable gas, liquid matter, and do not use in a coal mine.

• Battery can cause explosion or injury.

Do not dispose in fire or heat.

• Risk of fire or electric shock.

Do not use any power voltage except the one given on manufacturers instructions.

• Battery can cause outbreak of fire.

Do not use any other type of charger other than the one specified.

• Risk of fire or electric shock.

Do not use an AC cable incompatible with the power supply voltage in use.

• The short circuit of a battery can cause a fire.

Do not short circuit battery when storing it.

3
• Do not use within the vicinity of hospitals.
Malfunction of medical equipment could result.

• Use the instrument at a distance of at least 22 cm from anyone with a cardiac pacemaker.
Otherwise, the pacemaker may be adversely affected by the electromagnetic waves produced and cease to op-
erate as normal.

• Do not use onboard aircraft.

The aircraft instrumentation may malfunction as a result.

• Do not use within the vicinity of automatic doors, fire alarms and other devices with automat-
ic controls as the electromagnetic waves produced may adversely affect operation resulting
in an accident.

CAUTION
• Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in haz-
ardous radiation exposure.
• Let the laser beam reach the aimed object or the target without anybody else in the laser beam path. In case you
operate laser beam open, avoid radiating laser beam to the height of man's head. It is quite possible for the beam
to enter into one's eyes, and it is possible to lose visual sight temporarily, and lose one's caution and awareness
of other dangers - avoid glaring beam.
• Do not connect or disconnect equipment with wet hands, you are at risk of electric shocks if you do!
• Risk of injury by overturn the carrying case.
Do not stand or sit on the carrying cases.
• Please note that the tips of tripod can be hazardous, be aware of this when setting up or carrying the tripod.
• Risk of injury by falling down the instrument or case.
Do not use a carrying case with a damaged which belts, grips or latches.
• Do not allow skin or clothing to come into contact with acid from the batteries, if this does occur then wash off with
copious amounts of water and seek medical advice.
• A plumb bob can cause an injury to a person if used incorrectly.
• It could be dangerous if the instrument falls over, please ensure you attach a hand grip to the instrument securely.
• Ensure that you mount the Tribrach correctly, failing to do so may result in injury if the tribrach were to fall over.
• It could be dangerous if the instrument falls over, please check that you fix the instrument to the tripod correctly.
• Risk of injury by falling down a tripod and an instrument.
Always check that the screws of tripod are tightened.
• The battery is to be disposed of safely.
• The appliance is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision.
Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.

4
User
1)This product is for professional use only!
The user is required to be a qualified surveyor or have a good knowledge of surveying, in order to
understand the user and safety instructions, before operating, inspecting or adjusting.
2)Wear the required protectors (safety shoes, helmet, etc.) when operating.

Exceptions from Responsibility

1)The user of this product is expected to follow all operating instructions and make periodic checks of the
product’s performance.
2)The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for results of a faulty or intentional
usage or misuse including any direct, indirect, consequential damage, and loss of profits.
3)The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for consequential damage, and
loss of profits by any disaster, (an earthquake, storms, floods etc.).
A fire, accident, or an act of a third party and/or a usage any other usual conditions.
4)The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for any damage, and loss of profits
due to a change of data, loss of data, an interruption of business etc., caused by using the product or
an unusable product.
5)The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for any damage, and loss of profits
caused by usage except for explained in the user manual.
6)The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for damage caused by wrong
movement, or action due to connecting with other products.

5
Laser Safety
z Distance Measurement
GPT-3200N/NW series uses the invisible laser beam. The GPT-3200N/NW series are manufactured
and sold in accordance with "Performance Standards for Light-Emitting Products" (FDA/BRH 21 CFR
1040) or "Radiation Safety of Laser Products, Equipment Classification, Requirements and User`s
Guide" (IEC Publication 60825-1) provided on the safety standard for laser beam.
As per the said standard, the GPT-3200N/NW series is classified as "Class 1M (l) Laser Products".
Do not view beam directly with optical instruments.
In case of any failure, do not disassemble the instrument. Contact TOPCON or your TOPCON dealer.

z Laser pointer and Plumb Laser (Plumb laser is supplied for certain markets)
GPT-3200N/NW series plumb laser and laser pointer use the visible laser beam. The GPT-3200N/NW
series plumb laser and laser pointer are manufactured and sold in accordance with "Performance
Standards for Light-Emitting Products" (FDA/BRH 21 CFR 1040) or "Radiation Safety of Laser
Products, Equipment Classification, Requirements and User`s Guide" (IEC Publication 60825-1)
provided on the safety standard for laser beam.
As per the said standard, the GPT-3200N/NW series plumb laser and laser pointer type are classified
as "Class 2 (II) Laser Products".
In case of any failure, do not disassemble the instrument. Contact TOPCON or your TOPCON dealer.

Labels
Find the labels which describes the caution and safety about the laser beam as follows in GPT-3200N/
NW series.
We request you to replace it one anytime the caution labels are damaged or lost and paste a new one
at the same place. You can get the labels from Topcon or your dealer.

Laser aperture

Explanatory Label
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
DO NOTSTARE INTO BEAM
WAVE LENGTH 620nm-690nm
1mW MAXIMUM OUTPUT
Warning Label CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

Aperture Label LASER RADIATION

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
AVOID EXPOSURE Maximum output 1,W Wave length 690nm CW

LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

FROM THIS APERTURE
Laser aperture
(Only for laser plummet type.)

Symbol mark while the laser is emitting.

The following symbol mark will appear at the
right side of the second line. TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
X:-0°00'25" Symbol mark
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF L.PL

6
Contents
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Display for Safe Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Safety Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Exceptions from Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Laser Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Symbol mark while the laser is emitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Standard Set Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 Operating Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 Function Key (Soft Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.5 Star key mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6 Serial signal RS-232C connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.7 Bluetooth communication (Only for built-in Bluetooth model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.8 Laser Plummet ON/OFF (Only for Laser Plummet model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Setting Instrument Up for Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Power Switch Key ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Battery Power Remaining Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5 How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Measuring Horizontal Angle Right and Vertical Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Switching Horizontal Angle Right/Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Measuring from the Required Horizontal Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.1 Setting by Holding the Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.2 Setting a Horizontal Angle from the Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 Vertical Angle Percent Grade(%) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.5 Repetition Angle Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.6 Buzzer Sounding for Horizontal Angle 90° Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.7 Compasses (vertical angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Setting of the Atmospheric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Setting of the Correction for Prism Constant / Non-prism Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 Distance Measurement (Continuous Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4 Distance Measurement (N-time Measurement/Single Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.5 Fine Mode/Tracking Mode/Coarse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.6 Stake Out (S.O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.7 Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.7.1 Angle Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.7.2 Distance Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.7.3 Plane Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.7.4 Column Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Setting Coordinate Values of Occupied Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Setting Height of the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3 Setting Height of Target (Prism Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.4 Execution of Coordinate Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Application Measurement (PROGRAMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Remote Elevation measurement (REM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.2 Missing Line Measurement (MLM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3 Setting Z Coordinate of Occupied Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.4 Area Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.5 Point to Line Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

7
 6.2 Setting the GRID FACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3 Setting Illumination of Display and Cross Hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4 Setting Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.1 Setting Minimum Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.2 Auto Power Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.4.3 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.4 Systematic Error of Instrument Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.5 Selecting Battery Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.6 Heater ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.7 Setting RS-232C communication with external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.4.8 Selecting Communication Port (Only for built-in Bluetooth model) . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.4.9 Confirming the Bluetooth Device Address and Setting the PIN code
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.5 Setting Contrast of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.6 ROAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.6.1 Input Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.6.2 Input Road Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6.3 Search Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.6.4 Edit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.6.5 Set OCC and BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.6.6 Setout Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.7 Select a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.6.8 Initialize ROAD data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
7 DATA COLLECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1 Selecting a File for Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Selecting a Coordinate File for Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Occupied Point and Backsight Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2 Operational Procedure of DATA COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.1 Searching the recorded data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.2 Entering PCODE / ID using PCODE Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.3 Entering PCODE / ID from the list of PCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3 Data Collect Offset Measurement mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.1 Angle Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.2 Distance Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.3 Plane Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.3.4 Column Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.4 NEZ Auto Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.5 Point to Line Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.1 To change to the point to line measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.2 Executing a point to line measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.6 Editing PCODE Library [PCODE INPUT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.7 Setting Parameter of Data Collect [CONFIG.] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
8 LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.1 Setting the GRID FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 Selecting Coordinate Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.3 Setting Occupied Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.4 Setting Backsight Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2 Executing a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.1 Layout of Coordinates of Point to Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 Setting a New Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 Side Shot Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Resection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Display Internal Memory Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Searching Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.1 Measured Data Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Coordinate Data Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 PCODE LIBRARY Searching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.3 File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3.1 Rename a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3.2 Searching Data in a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

8
 9.3.3 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4 Coordinate Data Direct Key Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.1 Coordinate data input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.2 PTL (Point to Line) data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.5 Delete a Coordinate Data from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.6 Editing PCODE Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.7 Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.7.1 Sending Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.7.2 Loading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.7.3 Setting Parameter of Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.7.4 Confirming the parameters for Bluetooth communication
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.8 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
10 SET AUDIO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11 SETTING THE PRISM / NON-PRISM CONSTANT VALUE . . . . . . . . . 11-1
12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Calculation of Atmospheric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Setting of Atmospheric Correction Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
13 CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION AND EARTH CURVATURE . . . . 13-1
13.1 Distance Calculation Formula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 On-board Battery BT-52QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
15 DETACH/ATTACH OF TRIBRACH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
16 SELECTING MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.1 Items of the Selecting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2 How to Set Selecting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.1 Checking and adjusting of instrument constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.2 Checking the Optical Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.2.1 Checking the optical axis of EDM and theodolite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.2.2 Checking the optical axis of Laser pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17.3 Checking/Adjusting the Theodolite Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
17.3.1 Checking /Adjusting the Plate Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
17.3.2 Checking /Adjusting the Circular Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
17.3.3 Adjustment of the Vertical Cross-hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
17.3.4 Collimation of the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
17.3.5 Checking / Adjusting the Optical Plummet Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
17.3.6 Checking / Adjusting the Laser Plummet (For Laser Plummet type) . . . . . . . 17-12
17.3.7 Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13
17.4 How to Set the Instrument Constant Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14
17.5 Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
17.6 EDM Alignment Checking mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
17.7 Reference frequency check mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
18 TOP FIELD MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.1 MAIN MENU (Major Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.2 JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.2.1 To Create New Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.2.2 To Select Existing Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.2.3 To Delete Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.2.4 When Job is not to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.3 SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.4 GO TO WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
18.4.1 To Set Occupied Point and Backsight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
18.4.2 To Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
18.4.3 To Conduct Ordinary Measurement and to Record Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.5 DATA MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.5.1 To Add Coordinate Data To Add Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.5.2 To Delete Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
18.5.3 To View Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
18.5.4 To Edit Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
18.5.5 To Transfer Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22

9
19 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
20 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
21 BATTERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
22 PRISM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
23 ERROR DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
24 REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
25 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
APPENDIX ......................................................................................Appendix-1
Dual Axis Compensation ........................................................................................Appendix-1
Precaution when Charging or Storing Batteries.......................................................Appendix-3

10
Standard Set Composition
The numerical value in parentheses shows the quantity.

GPT-3200N/NW series (with lens cap) (1) Plastic carrying case(1), Shoulder belt (1)

On-board Battery BT-52QA (2) Battery charger BC-27M (1), AC cable (1)

Sun shade (1) Plastic rain cover (1)

Plumb bob set (1) Tool kit with case (1)

[ rod pin (2), screwdriver, hexagonal wrench (2),
cleaning brush ]

Plumb bob hook is including in the tool kit case.

Instruction manual (1) Silicon cloth (1)

(Make sure that all of the above items are with the instrument when purchased.)

Remarks:
When using BC-27M in North America, use only 120V ~.

11
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.1 Nomenclature

Handgrip locking screw

Handgrip

Objective lens
Laser pointer Instrument
Laser aperture center mark

Point guide

Display unit
Optical plummet
(Only for dual telescope
display unit type) (Optical plummet
telescope type only)

Circular level

Adjustment screw
for circular level

Leveling screw

Tribrach fixing lever Base

1-1
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

Sighting collimator

Battery locking lever

Telescope focusing knob

Telescope grip

On-board battery
BT-52QA

Telescope eyepiece
Instrument
center mark

Vertical motion clamp

Vertical tangent screw

Horizontal
tangent screw
Plate level

Display unit Horizontal

motion clamp

Power supply
connector

Serial Signal
connector

1-2
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.2 Display
z Display
The display uses a graphic LCD which has 4 lines and 20 characters per line. In general, the upper
three lines display measured data, and the bottom line displays the soft key function which changes
with the measuring mode.
z Contrast and Illumination
The contrast and illumination of display window are adjusted. See Chapter 6 “SPECIAL MODE
(Menu Mode)” or section 1.5 “Star key mode”.
z Heater (Automatic)
The built-in automatic heater functions when the temperature is below 0ﾟC. This keeps the display’s
speed up at temperatures lower than 0ﾟC. To set the heater ON/OFF, see section 6.4.6 “Heater ON/
OFF”. The operating time will become short if a heater is used.
z Example

V : 90°10'20" HR: 120°30'40"

HR: 120°30'40" HD* 65.432 m
VD: 12.345 m
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓ MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
Angle measurement mode Distance measurement mode

V-angle : 90°10’20” Horizontal-angle : 120°30’40”

H-angle : 120°30’40” Horizontal distance : 65.432m
Relative elevation : 12.345m

Feet unit Feet and inch unit

HR: 120°30'40" HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.45 f HD* 123.04.6f
VD: 12.34 f VD: 12.03.4f
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓ MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

Horizontal-angle : 120°30’40” Horizontal-angle : 120°30’40”

Horizontal distance : 123.45ft Horizontal distance : 123ft4in6/8in
Relative elevation : 12.34ft Relative elevation : 12ft3in4/8in

z Display marks

Display Contents Display Contents

V V-angle ∗ EDM working

HR H-angle right m Meter unit

HL H-angle left f Feet unit / Feet and inch unit

HD Horizontal distance N Switches non-prism mode or prism mode

P

VD Relative elevation Laser emitting mark

SD Slope distance Bluetooth is under communication.

N N coordinate (This symbol mark of the Bluetooth will

be displayed above the battery mark
E E coordinate when the non-prism total station is in
the state which can be communicated
Z Z coordinate by Bluetooth.)

1-3
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.3 Operating Key

POWER MENU

ABC DEF GHI

7 8 9

JKL MNO PQR ANG

4 5 6

STU VWX YZ+ ESC

1 2 3
# ENT
F1 F2 F3 F4 0 0 -

Alphanumeric characters key

Keys Name of Key Function

Star key mode is used for each presetting or displaying as follows.

1 Contrast of the display 2 Reticle illumination 3 Back Light
Star key
4 Non-prism/Prism 5 Laser pointer 6 Laser plummet (Laser plummet type
only) 7 Tilt correction 8 Point guide 9 Set audio mode

Coordinate
Coordinate measurement mode
meas.key

Distance meas.key Distance measurement mode

ANG Angle meas.key Angle measurement mode

To be menu mode. To set application measurements and adjust in the

MENU Menu key
menu mode.

z Returning to the measurement mode or previous layer mode from the

mode set.
z To be DATA COLLECTION mode or LAYOUT mode directly from the
ESC Escape key normal measurement mode.
z It is also possible to use as Record key in normal measurement mode.
To select function of Escape key,
see Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” .

ENT Enter key Press at the end of inputting values.

POWER Power source key ON/OFF of power source

Soft key
F1–F4 Responds to the message displayed.
(Function key)

1-4
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.4 Function Key (Soft Key)

The Soft Key message is displayed at the bottom line of display. The functions are according to the
displayed message.

Angle measurement mode Distance measurement mode

V: 90°10'20" HR: 120°30'40"

HR:120°30'40" HD*[r] << m
VD: m
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓ MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
TILT REP V% P2↓ OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓ --- m/f/i --- P3↓
Coordinates measurement mode

[F1] [F2] [F3] [F4] N: 123.456 m

E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
Soft keys MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
R.HT INSHT OCC P2↓
OFSET m/f/i S/A P3↓

Angle measurement
Soft Display
Page Function
key mark
F1 0SET Angle of Horizontal is set to 0°00'00"
F2 HOLD Hold the horizontal angle.
1
F3 HSET Sets a required horizontal angle by entering numerals.
F4 P1↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P2).
Setting Tilt Correction
F1 TILT
If ON, the display shows tilt correction value.
2 F2 REP Repetition angle measurement mode
F3 V% Vertical angle percent grade(%) mode
F4 P2↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P3).
F1 H-BZ Sets the buzzer sound for every horizontal angle 90°.
F2 R/L Switches R/L rotation of horizontal angle.
3
F3 CMPS Switches the COMPASS ON/OFF of vertical angle.
F4 P3↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P1).

Distance measurement mode

F1 MEAS Start measuring
F2 MODE Sets a measuring mode, Fine/Coarse/Tracking.
1
F3 NP/P Switches non-prism mode or prism mode.
F4 P1↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P2).
F1 OFSET Select Off-set measurement mode.
F2 S.O Select stake out measurement mode.
2
F3 S/A Select set audio mode.
F4 P2↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P3).
F2 m/f/i Switches meter, feet or feet and inch unit.
3
F4 P3↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P1).

1-5
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

Coordinate measurement mode

F1 MEAS Start measuring.
F2 MODE Sets a measuring mode, Fine/Coarse/Tracking.
1
F3 NP/P Switches non-prism mode or prism mode.
F4 P1↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P2).
F1 R.HT Sets a prism height by input values.
F2 INSHT Sets an instrument height by input values.
2
F3 OCC Sets an instrument coordinate point by input values.
F4 P2↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P3).
F1 OFSET Select Off-set measurement mode.
F2 m/f/i Switches meter, feet or feet and inch unit.
3
F3 S/A Select set audio mode.
F4 P3↓ The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P1).

1-6
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.5 Star key mode

Press the () key to view the instrument options.
The following instrument options can be selected from the ():
1.Adjustment the contrast of the display (0 to 9 steps) [ or ]
2.Adjustment the reticle illumination (1 to 9 steps) [ or ]
3.Turn the backlight of the display, reticle illumination ON / OFF
4.Select Non-prism mode / Prism mode
5.Turn the Laser pointer option ON/Blink/OFF
6. Turn the Laser plummet option ON/OFF (Only for the laser plummet type)
7.Setting Tilt Correction
8.Turn the Point Guide option ON/OFF
9.S/A (set audio) mode
Note: Star key mode does not function when the same function as the function assigned to the star
key mode is performed from the main routine.

V: 77°42'30"
HR:120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

Press the star () key.

Press the star () key.

Display
key Function
mark

F1 Turn the backlight of the display ON/OFF [ / ]

F2 Non-prism mode / Prism mode selection

F3 Turn the Laser pointer option ON / Blink / OFF [ / / ]

F4 Turn the Laser plummet option ON/OFF [ / ]

(Only for the laser plummet type)
F1 --- ----
Setting Tilt Correction
F2
If ON, the display shows tilt correction value.

F3 Turn the Point Guide option ON/OFF [ / ]

The light acceptance quantity level for the EDM (SIGNAL), the
F4 atmospheric correction value (PPM) and correction value of prism
constant (PSM) are displayed.

or Adjust the contrast of the display (0 to 9 steps)

Adjust the Reticle Illumination (1 to 9 steps)

or ON/OFF of the reticle illumination is linked with ON/OFF of the backlight.

1-7
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

z Adjustment the contrast (0 to 9 ) of the display

This enable you to adjust the contrast of the display.
Press the up or down arrow keys to adjust the contrast.

z Adjustment the reticle illumination (1 to 9 )

This enable you to adjust the reticle illumination.
Press the right or left arrow keys to adjust the reticle illumination.
The switch of reticle illumination will be interlocked with the switch of display backlight.

z Turn the display backlight ON/OFF

To turn the backlight ON, press the [F1] key. Press [F1] again to turn the backlight OFF.

z Switching the non-prism mode/prism mode

To switch the non-prism /prism mode, press the [F2](NP/P) key. For more information, see Chapter
4 “DISTANCE MEASUREMENT” .

z Lighting, Blinking, and Extinguishing of Laser Pointer

Whenever the [F3] (L.P.) key is pressed, the laser pointer will light up, blink, or be extinguished, in
that order. The laser pointer assists with collimation by radiating visible laser light from the objective
lens to the target.

Laser aperture

z The laser pointer indicates the approximate collimation position of the telescope. It does
not indicate the exact collimation position. To adjust the laser pointer, see 17.2.2
“Checking the optical axis of Laser pointer”.
z When the EDM is working, the laser pointer will blink.
z You cannot see the laser pointer when looking through the telescope. Therefore, please
look directly, with the naked eye, at the point indicated by the laser pointer.
z The distance to which the laser pointer can be used will vary with climatic conditions and
with the eyesight of the user.
z When the laser pointer is used, the operating time of internal power source will become
short.

1-8
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

z Tilt correction
The tilt setting mode performed here will not be memorized after powering OFF. To set TILT
correction in the initialized setting (it is memorized after powering OFF), see Section 6.4.3 “Vertical
and Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)”.

z Point guide
Fast and simple to use, the Point Guide feature is useful when doing stake out work. The Point
Guide System on the instrument telescope assist the rod person to get on-line. When using with the
Point Guide System, the operating time of internal power source will become short.

Turning the Point Guide ON and Operation:

Press the [F3] key to turn ON the Point Guide. Instrument

Looking at the objective lens of the telescope, the right
LED will blink and the left LED will stay lit.

The Point Guide should be used within a distance of 100

meters (328 feet). The quality of its results will depend on
the weather conditions and the user’s eyesight.

The goal of the rod person is to look at both LED’s on the

Illuminate Blink
instrument and move the prism on-line until both LED’s
are equally bright.

If the solid LED is brighter, move right.

If the blinking LED is brighter, move left.
Prism

Once you have determined that both of the LED's are equally bright, you are on-line with the
instrument.

Turning the Point Guide OFF:

To turn OFF the Point Guide System, press the [F3] key again.

z Set audio mode

The light acceptance quantity level (Signal level) is displayed in this mode.
When reflected light from the prism is received, a buzzer sounds. This function is good for easy
collimation when the target is difficult to find.
Press the [F4] key to view the set audio screen.
(1) To stop the buzzer, refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.
(2) Also, it is possible to display the signal level in Distance Measuring Mode.

The temperature, pressure, PPM, PSM and NPM can be viewed in set audio mode.
Refer to Chapter 10 “SET AUDIO MODE”, Chapter 11 “SETTING THE PRISM / NON-PRISM
CONSTANT VALUE” and Chapter 12 “SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION”, for further
instructions.

1-9
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.6 Serial signal RS-232C connector

The serial signal connector is used for connecting the GPT-3200N/NW series with a computer or
TOPCON Data Collector, which enables the computer to receive measured data from the GPT-3200N/
NW series or to send preset data of horizontal angle, etc. to it.

z The following data will be output at each mode.

Mode Output
Angle mode (V, HR or HL) (V in percent) V, HR (or HL)
Horizontal distance mode (HR, HD, VD) V, HR, HD, VD
Slope distance mode (V, HR, SD) V, HR, SD, HD
Coordinate mode N, E, Z, HR (or V, HR, SD, N, E, Z)

z The display and the output at the coarse mode are the same as the contents above.
z Output at the tracking mode is displayed as distance data only.

The details necessary for the connection with the GPT-3200N/NW series are obtained from the GPT-
3000 series Interface Manual which is optionally available. Please refer to the manual.

1.7 Bluetooth communication (Only for built-in Bluetooth model)

By built-in Bluetooth, it can communicate with Bluetooth instruments by wireless, without connecting a
serial signal connector.

1-10
 1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS

1.8 Laser Plummet ON/OFF (Only for Laser Plummet model)

Laser plummet option will help you to center the instrument easily onto the measurement point.
There are two ways to turn on/off of laser plummet option as follows.
z On/Off of laser plummet option by Soft Key in Tilt Correction

Operating procedure Option Display

1 Press the [F4] key to get the function page 2. [F4] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

TILT REP V% P2↓
2 Press the [F1](TILT) key. [F1] TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
In case ON is already selected, the display shows X:-0°00'25"
tilt correction value.
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF L.PL
3 Press the [F4](L.PL) key. [F4] TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
By pressing the [F4](L.PL) key, the laser plummet X:-0°00'25"
will be turned On / Off alternately.
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF L.PL

z Symbol mark while the laser is emitting.

The following symbol mark will appear at the right side of the second line.
TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
X:-0°00'25" Symbol mark
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF L.PL

z On/Off of laser plummet option from MENU mode

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [MENU] key. [MENU] MENU 1/4
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key twice to get the menu on [F4] MENU 3/4
page 3. [F4] F1:LASER PLUMMET
F2:ILLUMINATION
F3:PARAMETERS 1 P↓
3 Press the [F1] key. [F1] LASER PLUMMET [OFF]
F1:ON
F2:OFF

4 Press the [F1] or [F2] key to turn on or off the laser [F1] or [F2] LASER PLUMMET [ON]
plummet option. F1:ON
F2:OFF

Laser Plummet auto-cut off function

The laser plummet will be turned off automatically after 1 to 99 minutes (Default :3 minutes). It is also
possible to stop the auto-cut off function.
Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” to change the time or to invalidate the function.

1-11
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2.1 Setting Instrument Up for Measurement
Mount the instrument to the tripod. Level and center the instrument precisely to insure the best
performance. Use tripods with a tripod screw of 5/8 in. diameter and 11 threads per inch, such as the
Type E TOPCON wide- frame wooden tripod.
Reference: Leveling and Centering the Instrument

1. Setting up the Tripod 2 Rotate the instrument 90° (100gon) around its
First, extend the extension legs to suitable lengths vertical axis and turn the remaining leveling
and tighten the screws on their midsections. screw or C to center the bubble once more.
2. Attaching the Instrument on the Tripod
Head Leveling screw C
Place the instrument carefully on the tripod head
and slide the instrument by loosening the tripod
screw. If the plumb bob is positioned right over the
center of the point, slightly tighten the tripod 90
screw.
3. Roughly Leveling the Instrument by Using
the Circular Level
1 Turn the leveling screws A and B to move the
bubble in the circular level. The bubble is now
located on a line perpendicular to a line
running through the centers of the two leveling 3 Repeat the procedures 1 and 2 for each 90°
screws being adjusted. (100gon) rotation of the instrument and check
Leveling screw C whether the bubble is correctly centered for all
four points.

5. Centering by Using the Optical Plummet

Telescope
Adjust the eyepiece of the optical plummet
telescope to your eyesight.
Slide the instrument by loosening the tripod
screw, place the point on the center mark, and
then tighten the tripod screw. Sliding the
instrument carefully not to rotate that allows you
Leveling
Leveling screw B to get the least dislocation of the bubble.
screw A
Point
2 Turn the leveling screw C to bring the bubble
Center mark
to the center of the circular level.
4. Centering by Using the Plate Level
1 Rotate the instrument horizontally by using
the Horizontal motion/clamp screw and place
the plate level parallel with the line connecting
leveling screws A and B, and then bring the
bubble to the center of the plate level by
turning leveling screws A and B.

6. Completely Leveling the Instrument

Leveling the instrument precisely in a similar way
to 4. Rotate the instrument and check to see that
the bubble is in the center of the plate level
regardless of telescope direction, then tighten the
tripod screw hard.
Leveling
Leveling
screw A
screw B

2-1
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2.2 Power Switch Key ON

1 Confirm the instrument is leveled.

2 Press the power key.

Press the power key

TOPCON GPT-3200

V : 90°10'20"
HR: 0°00'00" Battery Power Remaining Display

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

z Confirm the battery power remaining display. Replace with charged battery or charge when battery
level is low or indicates “Battery empty”. see Section 2.3 “Battery Power Remaining Display”.

z Contrast adjustment
You can confirm prism constant value (PSM), non-prism constant value (NPM), atmospheric
correction value (PPM) and you can also adjust the contrast of the display when the instrument is
turned on.
To display this screen, see Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
PSM: 0.0 PPM 0.0
NPM: 0.0
↓ ↑ - - - ENTER

This enables you to adjust the brightness by pressing the [F1](↓) or [F2](↑) key.
To memorize the setting value after powering off, press [F4](ENTER) key.

2-2
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2.3 Battery Power Remaining Display

Battery power remaining display indicates the power condition.

V : 90°10'20"
HR: 0°00'00" Measurement is possible.

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

The power is poor. The battery

Battery power remaining display
should be recharged or replaced.
Blinking

<Battery empty> Measurement is impossible.

Other displays disappear. Need to recharge or replace
the battery.

Note: 1 The battery operating time will vary depending on the environmental conditions such as
ambient temperature, charging time, the number of times of charging and discharging
etc. It is recommended for safety to charge the battery beforehand or to prepare spare
full charged batteries.
2 For general usage of the battery, see Chapter 14 “POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING”.
3 The battery power remaining display shows the power level regarding to the
measurement mode now operating.
The safety condition indicated by the battery power remaining display in the angle
measurement mode does not necessarily assure the battery’s ability to be used in the
distance measurement mode.
It may happen that the mode change from the angle mode to the distance mode will stop
the operation because of insufficient battery power for the distance mode which
consumes more power than angle mode.

2-3
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2.4 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt Correction

(GPT-3207N/NW has vertical angle tilt correction only.)

When the tilt sensors are activated, automatic correction of vertical and horizontal angle for
mislevelment is displayed.
To ensure a precise angle measurement, tilt sensors must be turned on. The display can also be used
to fine level the instrument. If the (TILT OVER) display appears the instrument is out of automatic
compensation range and must be leveled manually.

Zenith
Zenith
Standing axis
Standing axis Inclination of the standing
Inclination of the standing axis in the Y direction
axis in the X direction

Horizontal Trunnion axis

z GPT-3200N/NW compensates both the vertical angle and the horizontal angle readings due to
inclination of the standing axis in the X and Y directions .
z For more information about dual axis compensation, refer to APPENDIX 1 “Dual Axis
Compensation”.

When the instrument is out of compensation. (TILT OVER)

V : ° ' " V : ° ' " V : ° ' "

HR: ° ' " HR: ° ' " HR: ° ' "

<X TILT OVER> <Y TILT OVER> <XY TILT OVER>

Standing Axis in the X direction Standing Axis in the Y direction Standing Axis in the X and Y
out of range out of range directions out of range

z The display of Vertical or Horizontal angle is unstable when instrument is on an unstable stage or a
windy day. You can turn off the auto tilt correction function of V/H angle in this case.
z To set auto tilt correction from the moment that power is on, see Section 6.4.3 “Vertical and
Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)”.

2-4
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

z Setting Tilt Correction by Soft Key

To enable you to select tilt ON/OFF function. setting is not memorized after power is OFF.
[Example] Setting X,Y Tilt OFF

Operating procedure Option Display

1 Press [F4] key to get the function page 2. [F4] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

TILT REP V% P2↓
2 Press [F1](TILT) key. [F1] TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
In case ON is already selected, the display shows X:-0°00'25"
tilt correction value.
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF ---
3 Press [F3](OFF) key. [F3] TILT SENSOR: [OFF]

X-ON XY-ON OFF ---

4 Press [ESC] key. [ESC] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

z The setting mode performed here will not be memorized after powering OFF. To set TILT correction in
the initialized setting (it is memorized after powering OFF), see Section 6.4.3 “Vertical and Horizontal
Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)”.

2-5
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2.5 How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters

This enables you to enter alphanumeric characters such as the instrument height, prism height,
occupied point, backsight point etc.

z How to select a item

[Example setting] Occupied point in the data collection mode.

The arrow indicates a item to enter.

PT# →ST-01
ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ

The arrow line moves up or down when the

[ ] key or [ ] key is pressed. [ ]
PT# :ST-01
or ID →
[ ] INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ

PT# :ST-01
ID :
INS.HT→ 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ

POWER MENU

ABC DEF GHI

7 8 9

JKL MNO PQR ANG

4 5 6

STU VWX YZ+ ESC

1 2 3
# ENT
F1 F2 F3 F4 0 0 -

Alphanumeric characters key

z How to enter characters

[Example setting] TOPCON-1

1 Move the arrow to enter a item using the [ ]

or [ ] key. PT# →
ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ

2-6
 2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2 Press the [F1] (INPUT) key.

The arrow changes to the equal (=) . PT# =
The instrument switches to numerical input mode. ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
3 Press the [F1] [ALP] key.
The instrument switches to alphabetical input mode. PT# =
ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[NUM][SPC][CLR][ENT]

4 Enter letters of the alphabet by pressing the alphanumeric PT# =T

characters key.
ID :
Example: [1] (STU) key is pressed twice.
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[NUM][SPC][CLR][ENT]

PT# =TOPCON
5 Enter other letters of the alphabet in the same way. ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[NUM][SPC][CLR][ENT]

6 Press the [F1] (NUM) key, again.

The instrument switches back to numerical input mode. PT# =TOPCON
ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]

7 Enter numbers by pressing the alphanumeric characters key. PT# =TOPCON-1

Example: [ - ], [1] key is pressed.
ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]

8 Press [F4](ENT) key.

The arrow moves to next item.

Select next character in the same manner.

z To correct a character, move the cursor to correct character by pressing [ ] or [ ] key and enter
again.

2-7
 3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT

3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3.1 Measuring Horizontal Angle Right and Vertical Angle
Make sure the mode is in Angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Collimate the 1st target (A). Collimate A V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

2 Set horizontal angle of target A at 0° 00' 00". [F1] H ANGLE 0 SET
Press the [F1](0 set) key and press the [F3](YES) > OK?
key.
--- --- [YES][NO]
[F3] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 0°00'00"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

3 Collimate the 2nd target (B). Collimate B V : 98°36'20"
The required V/H angle to target B will be HR: 160°40'20"
displayed.
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

Reference : How to Collimate

1 Point the telescope toward the light. Turn the diopter ring and adjust the diopter so that the cross
hairs are clearly observed.
(Turn the diopter ring toward you first and then backward to focus.)
2 Aim the target at the peak of the triangle mark of the sighting collimator. Allow a certain space
between the sighting collimator and yourself for collimating.
3 Focus the target with the focusing
knob.

* If parallax is created between the Focusing knob

cross hairs and the target when
viewing vertically or horizontally while Telescope eyepiece (Diopter ring)
looking into the telescope, focusing is
incorrect or diopter adjustment is poor.
This adversely affects precision in ∞ ∞
measurement or survey Eliminate the
parallax by carefully focusing ∞ ∞
and using diopter adjustment.

3-1
 3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT

3.2 Switching Horizontal Angle Right/Left

Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key twice to get the function [F4] V : 90°10'20"
on page 3. twice HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

TILT REP V% P2↓
H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓
2 Press the [F2](R/L) key. [F2] V : 90°10'20"
The mode Horizontal angle Right (HR) HL: 239°29'20"
switches to (HL) mode.
H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓
3 Measure as HL mode.

z Every time pressing the [F2](R/L) key, HR/HL mode switches.

3.3 Measuring from the Required Horizontal Angle

3.3.1 Setting by Holding the Angle
Make sure the mode is angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Set the required horizontal angle, using Display angle V : 90°10'20"
Horizontal tangent screw HR: 130°40'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

2 Press the [F2](HOLD) key. [F2] H ANGLE HOLD
HR: 130°40'20"
> SET ?
--- --- [YES][NO]
3 Collimate the target. Collimate

4 Press the [F3](YES) key to finish holding the [F3] V : 90°10'20"

horizontal angle.*1) HR: 130°40'20"
The display turns back to normal angle
measurement mode.
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

*1) To return to the previous mode, press the [F4](NO) key.

3-2
 3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT

3.3.2 Setting a Horizontal Angle from the Keys

Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Collimate the target. Collimate V : 90°10'20"
HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

2 Press the [F3](HSET) key. [F3] H ANGLE SET
HR=

--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

3 Input the required horizontal angle by V : 90°10'20"
using keys. *1) 70.4020 HR: 70°40'20"
[F4]
For example :70°40'20"
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓
When completed, normal measuring from the
required Horizontal angle is possible.

*1) To enter Alphanumeric characters, see Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

3.4 Vertical Angle Percent Grade(%) Mode

Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key to get the function on page 2. [F4] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

TILT REP V% P2↓
2 Press the [F3](V%) key. *1) [F3] V : -0.30 %
HR: 170°30'20"

TILT REP V% P2↓

*1) Every time pressing the [F3](V%) key, the display mode switches.
z When the measurement is carried out over ±45° (±100%) from the horizontal, the display shows
<OVER>.

3-3
 3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT

3.5 Repetition Angle Measurement

z Repetition angle measurement can be done by horizontal angle right measurement mode.

Make sure the mode is Horizontal Angle Right measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key to get the function on page 2. [F4] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

TILT REP V% P2↓
2 Press the [F2](REP)key. [F2] REPETITION ANGLE
> OK?

--- --- [YES][NO]

3 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 0]
Ht: 0°00'00"
Hm:
0SET V/H REL HOLD
4 Collimate the target A and press the [F1] (0SET) Collimate A REPETITION ANGLE
key. [F1] INITIALIZE
> OK?
--- --- [YES][NO]
5 Press the [F3] (YES) key. [F3] REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 0]
Ht: 0°00'00"
Hm:
0SET V/H REL HOLD
6 Collimate the target B using the horizontal clamp Collimate B REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 1]
and tangent screw. [F4] Ht: 45°10'00"
Press the [F4](HOLD) key.
Hm: 45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
7 Recollimate target A using the horizontal clamp Collimate A REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 1]
and tangent screw, and press the [F3](REL)key. [F3] Ht: 45°10'00"
Hm: 45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
8 Recollimate target B using the horizontal clamp Collimate B REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 2]
and tangent screw, and press the [F4](HOLD) key. [F4] Ht: 90°20'00"
Hm: 45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD

9 Repeat 7 to 8 to measure the desired number of REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 4]

repetitions. Ht: 180°40'00"
Hm: 45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
[Example] 4 measurement

3-4
 3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT

10 To return to the normal angle mode, press the [ESC] REPETITION ANGLE
[F2](V/H) key or [ESC] key. or Exit
[F2] > OK?
--- --- [YES][NO]

11 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] V : 90°10'20"

HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

z Horizontal angle can be accumulated up to

(3600°00'00" – minimum reading) (horizontal angle right).
In case of 5 second reading, horizontal angle can be accumulated up to +3599°59'55".
z Error will be displayed when the results differ from first measurement by more than ±30".

3.6 Buzzer Sounding for Horizontal Angle 90° Increments

When the horizontal angle falls in the range of less than ± 1° of 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°, the buzzer
sounds. Buzzer stops only when the horizontal angle is adjusted to 0°00’00”, 90°00’00” , 180°00’00” or
270°00’00”.
This setting is not memorized after powering off. Refer to 16 “SELECTING MODE” to set the initial
setting (memorized after powering off).
Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key twice to get the function [F4] V : 90°10'20"
on page 3. twice HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓
2 Press the [F1](H-BZ) key. [F1] H-ANGLE BUZZER [OFF]
The data previously set is shown.

[ON] [OFF] --- ENTER

3 Press the [F1](ON) key or [F2](OFF) key to select [F1] or [F2] H-ANGLE BUZZER [ON]
the buzzer ON/OFF.

[ON] [OFF] --- ENTER

4 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] V : 90°10'20"
HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

3-5
 3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT

3.7 Compasses (vertical angle)

Vertical angle is displayed as shown below.

+90°

0° 0°

-90°

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key twice to get the function [F4] V : 98°10'20"
on page 3. twice HR: 170°30'20"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓
2 Press the [F3](CMPS) key. *1) [F3] V : - 8°10'20"
HR: 170°30'20"

H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓

*1) Every time pressing the [F3](CMPS) key, the display mode switches.

3-6
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
Note: Those distance shorter than 1m and 500m or more will not be displayed in Non-prism
mode.

z Prism mode and Non-prism mode

You can select measurement mode between Prism mode which collimating a prism and Non-prism
mode that is collimating a target object except prism.

z Regardless of whether the laser pointer is used, measurement is possible with both the non-prism
mode and the prism mode. That is, when the GPT-3200N/NW is used in the open air, in an urban
area, etc., the laser pointer can be stopped and distance measurement then conducted, making it
possible to prevent the laser light from hitting a third party.
z When using a reflection sheet, measure with the prism mode.
z For measurement with a prism, be sure to measure with the prism mode. If you measure with the
non-prism mode, accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
z Non-prism mode enables all distance measurements such Distance measurement, Coordinate
measurement, Offset measurement and Layout.
z To switch over Prism mode to Non-prism mode or contrary, press the [NP/P] soft key in each
measurement display. [NP] of Non-prism mode indicator will be shown at the right corner of the
display in Non-prism mode measurement.
Changing mode shall be done before measurement.

Example Distance measurement mode Coordinate measurement mode

HR: 120°30'40" N: 120.456 m

N N
HD* 65.432 m P E: 34.567 m P
VD: 12.345 m Non-prism Z: 12.345 m
mode
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓ MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
indicator

To change the mode, press the [NP/P] soft key in each measurement.

z It is possible to set Non-prism mode for distance measurement during the power on time. Refer to
16.SELECTING MODE to set the option.
z If happened collimating the near distance prism in Non-prism mode, measurement will not be done
because of too much light.

4.1 Setting of the Atmospheric Correction

When setting the atmospheric correction, obtain the correction value by measuring the temperature
and pressure. Refer to Section 12.2 “Setting of Atmospheric Correction Value”.

4.2 Setting of the Correction for Prism Constant / Non-prism Constant

Topcon’s prism constant value is 0. Set correction for prism at 0. If the prism is of another manufacture,
the appropriate constant shall be set beforehand. Refer to Chapter 11 “SETTING THE PRISM / NON-
PRISM CONSTANT VALUE”. The setting value is kept in the memory even after power is off.

Note: Confirm that Non-prism correction value is set at zero before measurement target such
as a wall in Non-prism mode.

4-1
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.3 Distance Measurement (Continuous Measurement)

Make sure the mode displays angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Collimate the center of prism. Collimate P V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

2 Press the [ ] key. [ ] HR: 120°30'40"

Distance measurement starts. *1),2) HD*[r] << m
VD: m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

The measured distances are shown. *3)~*5) HR: 120°30'40"

HD* 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

[ ] V : 90°10'20"
z Pressing the [ ] key again, the display
HR: 120°30'40"
changes to horizontal (HR) and vertical (V)angle
and slope distance(SD). *6)
SD* 131.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*
*1) When EDM is working, the " " mark appears in the display.
*2) To change mode from Fine to Coarse or Tracking, refer to section 4.5 “Fine Mode/Tracking Mode/
Coarse Mode”.
To set the distance measurement on when the instrument is powered on, refer to Chapter 16
“SELECTING MODE”.
*3) The distance unit indicator "m" (for meter) , "f" (for feet or feet inch) appears and disappears
alternatively with buzzer sounds at every renewal of distance data.
*4) Measurement may repeat automatically in the instrument if the result is affected by shimmer etc.
*5) To return to the normal measuring angle mode from a distance measuring mode, press the [ANG] key.
*6) It is possible to choose the display order (HR, HD, VD) or (V, HR, SD) for initial measuring distance
mode. Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

4-2
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.4 Distance Measurement (N-time Measurement/Single Measurement)

When the number of times measurement is preset, the GPT-3200N/NW series measures the distance
the set number of times. The average distance will be displayed.
When presetting the number of times as 1, it does not display the average distance, because of single
measurement. Single measurement is set at the factory.

Make sure the mode displays angle measurement.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Collimate the center of prism. V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

2 Press the [ ] key. [ ] HR: 120°30'40"
Continuous measuring starts.*1) HD*[r] << m
VD: m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
3 Press [F1](MEAS) key while continuous [F1] HR: 120°30'40"
measuring is exceeding. *2) HD*[n] << m
VD: m
The average value is displayed and "*" mark
disappears.
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

z While EDM is working, press [F1](MEAS) key

again, the mode will be changed to continuous HR: 120°30'40"
measuring mode. HD: 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) It is possible to set the measurement mode for N-times measurement mode or continuous
measurement mode when the power is turned on. Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.
*2) For setting the number of times (N-times) in the measurement, refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING
MODE”.

4-3
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

z Choose meter /feet / feet+inch unit by soft key

It is possible to change the unit for distance measurement mode by soft key.
This setting is not memorized after power off. Refer to 16 “SELECTING MODE” to set at the initial
setting (memorized after power off).

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](P1↓) key twice to get the function [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
on page 3. HD* 2.000 m
VD: 3.000 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
--- m/f/i --- P3↓
2 Press the [F2](m/f/i) key, the display unit will be [F2] HR: 120°30'40"
changed. HD* 6.560 f
z Every time pressing the [F2](m/f/i) key, the unit
VD: 9.845 f
mode switches.
--- m/f/i --- P3↓

4.5 Fine Mode/Tracking Mode/Coarse Mode

This setting is not memorized after power is off. Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” to set at the
initial setting (memorized after power is off).

•Fine Mode : This is a normal distance measuring mode.

The unit to be displayed can be changed.
Measurement time will vary depending on the unit to be displayed.

•Tracking Mode : This mode measures in shorter time than in fine mode.
It is very useful when tailing the moving object or carrying out stake-out work.

•Coarse Mode : This mode measures in shorter time than in fine mode.
The unit to be displayed can be changed.

To change the unit to be displayed in fine mode, see Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” and to change
the unit in course mode, see section 6.4.1 “Setting Minimum Reading”.
For the details of the unit and measurement time in each mode, see Chapter 25 “SPECIFICATIONS”.

Operating procedure Operation Display

HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.456m
VD: 5.678m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
1 Press the [F2](MODE) key from the distance [F2] HR: 120°30'40"
measuring mode.*1) HD* 123.456m
VD: 5.678m
The initial character (F/T/C) of set mode is
displayed . (F:Fine, T:Tracking, C:Coarse)
FINE TRACK COARSE F

2 Press the [F1](FINE) key, [F2](TRACK) key, or [F1]~[F3] HR: 120°30'40"

[F3](COARSE) key. HD* 123.456m
VD: 5.678m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) To cancel the setting, press the [ESC] key.

4-4
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.6 Stake Out (S.O)

The difference between the measured distance and the input stake out distance is displayed.
Measured distance — Stake out distance = Displayed value
z In stake out operation, you can select either horizontal distance (HD), relative elevation (VD) and
slope distance (SD)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key in the distance measuring [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
mode to get the function on page 2. HD* 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F2](S.O) key. [F2] STAKE OUT
HD : 0.000 m
The data previously set is shown.
HD VD SD ---
3 Select the measuring mode by pressing the [F1] to [F1] STAKE OUT
[F3] key. HD = 0.000 m
Example : Horizontal distance
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter the distance for stake out. *1) Enter data STAKE OUT
[F4] HD : 100.000 m

INPUT --- --- ENTER

5 Collimate the target (Prism). Collimate P HR: 120°30'40"
dHD*[r] << m
VD: m
Measuring starts.
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

The difference between the measured distance HR: 120°30'40"

and the stake out distance is displayed.
dHD* 23.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
6 Move the target until the difference becomes 0m.
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) Refer to section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z To return to normal distance measurement mode, stake out distance to "0" or turn the power off.

4-5
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.7 Offset Measurement

There are four offset measurement modes in the Offset Measurement.
z Angle offset
z Distance offset
z Plane offset
z Column offset
To show the offset measurement menu, press the [OFSET] soft key from distance or coordinate
measurement mode.
Example: Coordinate measurement
Distance measurement

HR: 120°30'40" N: 123.456 m

HD: 123.456 m E: 34.567 m
VD: 5.678 m Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓ MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓ R.HT INSHT OCC P2↓
OFSET m/f/i S/A P3↓
Press the [F1](OFSET) key.
Press the [F1](OFSET) key.

Offset Measurement Menu

OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG.OFFSET
F2:DIST.OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
[F4]
OFFSET 2/2
F1:COLUMN OFFSET

P↓

z Outputting the Measurement Data

The results of offset measurement can be output to external device.
Setting the function of the [ESC] key to (REC), the [F3] soft key which assigned (REC) will appear in
measured result display.
Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” to set this option.

OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
SD: 123.456 m
NEXT --- REC ---

[F3]

z Distance measurement mode of the offset measurement

Offset measurement will be done by N-time fine measurement mode.
For setting measuring times refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

4-6
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.7.1 Angle Offset

This mode is useful when it is difficult to set up the prism directly, for example at the center of a tree.
Place the prism at the same horizontal distance from the instrument as that of point A0 to measure.
To measure the coordinates of the center position, operate the offset measurement after setting the
instrument height/prism height.

When measuring coordinates of ground point A1

:Set the instrument height/prism height.

When measuring coordinates of point A0 : Set

the instrument height only. (Set the prism height
Prism P
to 0 ).

Prism height

When sighting to A0, you can select one of two

ways. One is to fix vertical angle to the prism
position even updown the telescope position, and
the other is to gear vertical angle to the updown of
telescope movement. In case following the
vertical angle to the movement of telescope,
SD(Slope Distance) and VD(Vertical Distance)
will be changed according to the movement of
telescope.
To set this option, refer to Chapter 16
Instrument height “SELECTING MODE”.

Occ. Point

z Set the instrument height/prism height before proceeding to the offset measurement mode.
z When setting the coordinate value for the occupied station, refer to Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate
Values of Occupied Point”.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](P1↓) key from distance measuring [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
mode to get the function on page 2. HD: 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG.OFFSET
F2:DIST.OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P1↓
3 Press the [F1](ANG. OFFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
HD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
4 Collimate prism P, and press the [F1](MEAS) key. Collimate P OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
[F1] HR: 110°20'30"
HD* [n] << m
>Measuring...

4-7
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

The horizontal distance from the instrument to the OFFSET-MEASUREMENT

prism will be measured.
HR: 110°20'30"
HD: 56.789 m
NEXT --- --- ---
5 Collimate point A0 using the horizontal motion Collimate OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
clamp and horizontal tangent screw. A0 HR: 113°30'50"
HD: 56.789 m
NEXT --- --- ---
6 Show the relative elevation of point A0. OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
[ ]
HR: 113°20'30"
VD: 3.456 m
NEXT --- --- ---
7 Show the slope distance of point A0. OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
[ ]
HR: 113°20'30"
z Each time pressing the [ ] key, horizontal SD: 56.894 m
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
NEXT --- --- ---
shown in sequence.
8 Show N coordinate of point A0 or A1. OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
[ ]
HR: 113°20'30"
N : -12.345 m
z Each time pressing [ ] key, N,E and Z NEXT --- --- ---
coordinate are shown in sequence.
z To return to procedure 4, press the [F1](NEXT) key.
z To return to the previous mode, press the [ESC] key.
z To select the Non-prism or Prism mode, press the [F3](NP/P) key after the step 3.

4-8
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.7.2 Distance Offset Measurement

The measurement of a place apart from a prism is possible by inputting offset horizontal distance of
front and back / right and left.
Forward HD
oHD sign A0

A1 RorL HD

Prism height

Prism P

Instrument height
Occ.Point
When measuring coordinates of ground point A1: Set the instrument height / prism height.
When measuring coordinates of point A0: Set the instrument height only.
(Set the prism height to 0 ).

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](P1↓) key from distance measuring [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
mode to get the function on page 2. HD: 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG.OFFSET
F2:DIST.OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F2](DIST. OFFSET) key. [F2] DISTANCE OFFSET
INPUT RorL HD
oHD= m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter Right and Left direction offset value, and Enter HD DISTANCE OFFSET
press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] INPUT FORWARD HD
oHD= m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Enter Forward direction offset value, and press Enter HD DISTANCE OFFSET
the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] HR: 80°30'40"
HD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
6 Collimate prism P, and press the [F1](MEAS) key. Collimate DISTANCE OFFSET
Measuring will start. P1 HR: 80°30'40"
[F1] HD* [n] << m
>Measuring...

4-9
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

After measuring, the result added offset value will DISTANCE OFFSET
be shown.
HR: 80°30'40"
HD* 10.000 m
NEXT --- --- ---
7 Show the relative elevation of point P0. DISTANCE OFFSET
[ ]
z Each time pressing the [ ] key, horizontal HR: 80°30'40"
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
VD: 11.789 m
shown in sequence.
NEXT --- --- ---

DISTANCE OFFSET
HR: 80°30'40"
SD: 11.789 m
NEXT --- --- ---
z Show coordinate of point P0. N : 12.345 m
[ ]
E : 23.345 m
Z : 1.345 m
NEXT --- --- ---

z To return to procedure 4, press [F1](NEXT) key.

z To return to the previous mode, press [ESC] key.
z To select the Non-prism or Prism mode, press the [F3](NP/P) key after the step 4.

4-10
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.7.3 Plane Offset Measurement

Measuring will be taken for the place where direct measuring can not be done, for example distance or
coordinate measuring for a edge of a plane.
Three random prism points (P1, P2, P3) on a plane will be measured at first in the plane offset
measurement to determine the measured plane. Collimate the measuring target point (P0) then the
instrument calculates and displays coordinate and distance value of cross point between collimation
axis and of the plane.

Edge P

P3 P2

Target heights of P1 to P3 is set to zero automatically.

z When setting the coordinate value for the occupied station, refer to Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate
Values of Occupied Point”.
Example: Non-prism measurement
Operating procedure Operation Display
1 Press the [F4](P1↓) key from distance measuring [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
mode to get the function on page 2. HD: 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG.OFFSET
F2:DIST.OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F3](PLANE OFFSET) key. [F3] PLANE
N001#:
SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
4 Press the [F3](NP/P) key to change to the non- [F3] PLANE
prism mode. N001#: N
P
SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
5 Collimate first point P1, and press the [F1](MEAS) Collimate PLANE
key. P1 N001#: N
P
N-time measuring will start. [F1] SD* [n] << m
After measuring, the display will show the second
point measurement.
>Measuring...

4-11
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

6 Measure the second and third points in the same Collimate PLANE
way. P2 N002#: N
P
[F1] SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---

Collimate PLANE
P3 N
N003#: P
[F1] SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---

The instrument calculates and displays coordinate HR: 80°30'40"

and distance value of cross point between
HD: 54.321 m NP
collimation axis and of the plane. *1), 2)
VD: 10.000 m
EXIT
7 Collimate the edge (P0) of the plane. *3), 4) Collimate HR: 75°30'40"
P0 HD: 54.600 m NP
VD: -0.487 m
EXIT
8 To show the slope distance (SD), press the [ ] V : 90°30'40"
key. HR: 75°30'40" NP
SD: 56.602 m
z Each time pressing the [ ] key, horizontal EXIT
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
z To show coordinate of point P0, press the [ ]
key.
9 To escape the measuring, press the [F1](EXIT)
key. The display returns to the previous mode.

*1) In case the calculation of plane was not successful by the measured three points, error displays. Start
measuring over again from the first point.
*2) Data display is the mode beforehand of offset measurement mode.
*3) Error will be displayed when collimated to the direction which does not cross with the determined plane.
*4) The point height of the target point P0 is set to zero automatically.

4-12
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

4.7.4 Column Offset Measurement

If it is possible to measure circumscription point (P1) of column directly, the distance to the center of the
column (P0), coordinate and direction angle can be calculated by measured circumscription points (P2)
and (P3).
The direction angle of the center of the column is 1/2 of total direction angle of circumscription points
(P2) and (P3).

P2 P

P P3

z When setting the coordinate value for the occupied station, refer to Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate
Values of Occupied Point”.
Example: Non-prism measurement
Operating procedure Operation Display
1 Press the [F4](P1↓) key from distance measuring [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
mode to get the function on page 2. HD: 123.456 m
VD: 5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG.OFFSET
F2:DIST.OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F4](P↓) key. [F4] OFFSET 2/2
F1:COLUMN OFFSET

P↓
4 Press the [F1](COLUMN OFFSET) key. [F1] COLUMN OFFSET
Center
HD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
5 Press the [F3](NP/P) key to change to the non- [F3] COLUMN OFFSET
prism mode. Center N
P
HD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---

4-13
 4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

6 Collimate the center of the column (P1) and press Collimate COLUMN OFFSET
the [F1](MEAS) key. P1 Center N
P
N-time measuring will start. [F1] HD* [n] << m
After the measurement, angle measuring display
of the left side (P2) will be shown.
>Measuring...

7 Collimate the left side of the column (P2) and Collimate COLUMN OFFSET
press the [F4](SET) key. P2 Left N
After the measurement, angle measuring display P
[F4] HR: 120°30'40"
of the right side (P3) will be shown.
--- --- --- SET

8 Collimate the right side of the column (P3) and Collimate COLUMN OFFSET
press the [F4](SET) key. P3 Right N
P
[F4] HR: 180°30'40"
--- --- --- SET

The distance between the instrument and center COLUMN OFFSET

of the column (P0) will be calculated.
HR: 150°30'40" NP
HD: 43.321 m
NEXT --- --- ---
9 To show the relative elevation (VD), press the COLUMN OFFSET
[ ]
[ ] key. HR: 150°30'40" NP
Each time pressing the [ ] key, horizontal VD: 2.321 m
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are NEXT --- --- ---
shown in sequence.
z To show coordinate of point P0, press the [ ]
key.
10 To escape the measuring, press the [ESC] key.
The display returns to the previous mode.

4-14
 5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT

5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT
5.1 Setting Coordinate Values of Occupied Point
Set the coordinates of the instrument (occupied point) according to coordinate origin, and the
instrument automatically converts and displays the unknown point (prism point) coordinates following
the origin.
It is possible to retain the coordinates of the occupied point after turning the power off.
Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.
Prism (n,e,z)
N
z
n

Occupied point C

Origin(0,0,0)
E
e

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key from the coordinate [F4] N: 123.456 m
measurement mode to get the function on page 2. E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
R.HT INSHT OCC P2↓
2 Press the [F3](OCC) key. [F3] N= 0.000 m
E: 0.000 m
Z: 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Enter N coordinate value. *1) Enter data N: -72.000 m
[F4] E= 0.000 m
Z: 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter E and Z coordinate values in the same N: 51.456 m
manner. E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
After entering the values, the display returns
coordinate measuring display.
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input range –99999999.9990 < N,E,Z < +99999999.9990 m
–99999999.999 < N,E,Z < +99999999.999 ft.
–99999999.11.7 < N,E,Z < +99999999.11.7 ft.+inch

5-1
 5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT

5.2 Setting Height of the Instrument

It is possible to retain the height of instrument after turning the power off. Refer to Chapter 16
“SELECTING MODE”.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key from the coordinate [F4] N: 123.456 m
measurement mode to get the function on page 2. E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
R.HT INSHT OCC P2↓
2 Press the [F2](INSHT) key. [F2] INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
The current value is displayed. INPUT
INS.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Enter the instrument height. *1) Enter Inst.HT N: 123.456 m
[F4] E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input range –999.9999 < Instrument height < +999.9999 m
–999.999 < Instrument height < +999.999 ft.
–999.11.7 < Instrument height < +999.11.7 ft.+inch

5.3 Setting Height of Target (Prism Height)

This mode can be used to obtain Z coordinate values . It is possible to retain the height of target after
turning the power off. Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F4](↓) key from the coordinate [F4] N: 123.456 m
measurement mode to get the function on page 2. E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
R.HT INSHT OCC P2↓
2 Press the [F1](R.HT) key. [F1] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
The current value is displayed. INPUT
R.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Enter the prism height. *1) Enter R. HT N: 123.456 m
[F4] E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input range –999.9999 < Prism height < +999.9999 m
–999.999 < Prism height < +999.999 ft.
–999.11.7 < Prism height < +999.11.7 ft.+inch

5-2
 5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT

5.4 Execution of Coordinate Measuring

Measure the coordinates by entering the instrument height and prism height, coordinates of unknown
point will be measured directly.
z When setting coordinate values of occupied point, see Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate Values of
Occupied Point”
z When setting the instrument height and prism height, see Section 5.2 “Setting Height of the
Instrument” and 5.3 “Setting Height of Target (Prism Height)”.
z The coordinates of the unknown point are calculated as shown below and displayed:
Coordinates of occupied point : (N0, E0,Z0)
Instrument height : INS.HT
Prism height : R.HT
Vertical distance (Relative elevation) : z (VD)
Coordinates of the center of the prism,
originated from the center point of the instrument : (n,e,z)
Coordinates of unknown point : (N1,E1,Z1)
N1=N0+n
E1=E0+e
Z1=Z0+INS.HT+z - R.HT

Coordinates of the center of the prism, originated from the

center point of the instrument (n, e, z)

Center point of the instrument

(No, Eo, Zo+INS.HT)

Unknown point
(N1, E1, Z1)

Occupied point (No, Eo, Zo)

Origin (o, o, o)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Set the direction angle of known point A. *1) Set direction V : 90°10'20"
angle HR: 120°30'40"
2 Collimate target prism. Collimate P 0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

3 Press the [ ] key. [ ] N*[r] << m

Measuring starts. E: m
Z: m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

The result will be shown. N* 123.456 m

E: 34.567 m
Z: 78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓

*1) Refer to Section 3.3 “Measuring from the Required Horizontal Angle”.
z In case the coordinate of instrument point is not entered, (0,0,0) will be used as the default for the
instrument point.
The instrument height will be calculated as 0 when the instrument height is not entered.
z The prism height will be calculated as 0 when the prism height is not set.

5-3
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

By pressing the [MENU] key, the instrument will be in MENU mode.
In this mode, special measuring , setting and adjustment are possible.

Normal measurement mode

[ESC] [MENU]

MENU 1/3 [ESC] [F1]

"TOP FIELD MODE"
F1:TOP FIELD
[ESC] See Chapter 18 “TOP FIELD MODE”.
F2:DATA COLLECT
[F2]
F3:LAYOUT P↓ "DATA COLLECTION MODE"
[F4]
See Chapter 7 “DATA COLLECTION”.
[F3]
"LAYOUT MODE"

See Chapter 8 “LAYOUT”.

MENU 2/3
[ESC] F1:MEMORY MGR. [ESC] [F1]
F2:PROGRAMS "MEMORY MANAGER MODE"
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
See Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER
[F4] MODE”.

Programs
PROGRAMS 1/2
[F2] F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓

Grid factor
GRID FACTOR
[F3] =1.000000

>MODIFY? [YES][NO]

Reticle illumination
MENU 3/3 ILLUMINATION[ON:1]
[ESC] F1:ILLUMINATION [ESC] [F1] F1:ON
F2:PARAMETERS 1 F2:OFF
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓ F3:LEVEL
[F4] Setting mode 1
PARAMETERS 1 1/3
[F2] F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓

Display contrast adjustment

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
[F3] LEVEL:4

↓ ↑ --- ENTER

6-1
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.1 Application Measurement (PROGRAMS)

6.1.1 Remote Elevation measurement (REM)
To obtain elevation of the point at which setting the target prism is not possible, place the prism at any
point on the vertical line from the target then carry out REM procedure as follows.

Target K

Prism

Prism height

Instrument

1) With prism height (h) input (Example :h=1.5m)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F1](REM) key. [F1] REM
F1:INPUT R.HT
F2:NO R.HT

4 Press the [F1] key. [F1] REM-1

<STEP-1>
R.HT = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Enter prism height. *1)
REM-1
Enter R.HT
<STEP-2>
[F4]
HD: m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
6 Collimate prism. Collimate P

7 Press the [F1](MEAS) key. [F1] REM-1

Measuring starts. <STEP-2>
HD*[n] << m
>Measuring...

6-2
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument REM-1

and prism will be shown.
<STEP-2>
HD* 123.456 m
>Measuring...

REM-1
VD: 1.500 m

––– R.HT HD –––

8 Collimate target K. Collimate K REM-1
Vertical distance (VD) will be shown. *2),3) VD: 10.456 m

––– R.HT HD –––

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) To return to procedure 5, press the [F2](R.HT) key.
To return to procedure 6, press the [F3](HD) key.
*3) To return to PROGRAMS Menu, press the [ESC] key.

2) Without prism height input

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F1](REM) key. [F1] REM
F1:INPUT R.HT
F2:NO R.HT

4 Press the [F2] key. [F2] REM-2

<STEP-1>
HD: m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
5 Collimate prism. Collimate P

6 Press the [F1](MEAS) key. [F1] REM-2

Measuring starts. <STEP-1>
HD* [n] << m
>Measuring...

Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument REM-2

and prism will be shown.
<STEP-1>
HD* 123.456 m
>Measuring...

6-3
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

The prism position will be decided. REM-2

<STEP-2>
V : 60°45'50"
––– ––– ––– SET
7 Collimate ground point G. Collimate G REM-2
<STEP-2>
V : 123°45'50"
––– ––– ––– SET
8 Press the [F4](SET) key. [F4] REM-2
The position of point G will be decided. *1) VD: 0.000 m

––– V HD –––
9 Collimate target K. Collimate K REM-2
Vertical distance (VD) will be shown. *2) VD: 10.456 m

––– V HD –––

*1) To return to procedure 5, press the [F3](HD) key.

To return to procedure 7, press the [F2](V) key.
*2) To return to PROGRAMS Menu, press the [ESC] key.

6-4
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.1.2 Missing Line Measurement (MLM)

Measurement for horizontal distance (dHD), slope distance (dSD), elevation (dVD) and horizontal
bearing (HR) between two target prisms.
It is possible to enter the coordinate value directly or calculate from coordinate data file.
MLM mode has two modes.
1: MLM-1 (A-B, A-C) :Measurement is A-B, A-C, A-D,......
2: MLM-2 (A-B, B-C) :Measurement is A-B, B-C, C-D,......

Prism A

Prism B
Instrument Prism C

Instrument
Prism A

Prism B

z It is necessary to set the direction angle of the instrument.

[Example] MLM-1 (A-B, A-C)

z Procedure of MLM-2 (A-B, B-C) mode is completely same as MLM-1 mode

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F2](MLM) key. [F2] MLM
F1:USE FILE
F2:DON’T USE

4 Press the [F1] or [F2] key to select using [F2] GRID FACTOR
coordinate file. F1:USE G.F.
[Example:F2 : DON’T USE]
F2:DON’T USE

6-5
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

5 Press the [F1] or [F2] key to select using [F2] MLM

GRID FACTOR. F1:MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
[Example:F2 : DON’T USE]
F2:MLM-2(A-B, B-C)

6 Press the [F1] key. [F1] MLM-1(A-B, A-C)

<STEP-1>
HD: m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
7 Collimate prism A, and press the [F1](MEAS) key. Collimate A MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument [F1] <STEP-1>
and prism A will be shown.
HD*[n] << m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P

MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-1>
HD* 123.456 m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
The prism position will be decided. MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-2>
HD: m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
8 Collimate prism B and press the [F1](MEAS) key. Collimate B MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument [F1] <STEP-2>
and prism B will be shown.
HD*[n] << m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P

MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-2>
HD* 345.678 m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
The horizontal distance (dHD) and relative MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
elevation (dVD) between prism A and B.
dHD : 123.456 m
dVD : 12.345 m
––– ––– HD –––
9 To show slope distance (dSD) , press [ ] key. [ ] MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
dSD : 124.072 m
HR : 12°34'40"
––– ––– HD –––
10 To measure the distance between points A and C, [F3] MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
press the [F3](HD). *1) <STEP-2>
HD: m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
11 Collimate point C (Prism C) and press the Collimate
[F1](MEAS) key. prism C
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument [F1]
and prism C will be shown.

6-6
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

The horizontal distance (dHD) and relative MLM-1(A-B, A-C)

elevation (dVD) between prism A and C.
dHD : 234.567 m
dVD : 23.456 m
––– ––– HD –––
12 To measure the distance between points A and D,
repeat procedure 12 to14. *1)

*1) To return to previous mode, press the [ESC] key.

z How to use coordinate data

It is possible to input coordinate value directly or calculate from coordinate data file

Operating procedure Operation Display

To use coordinate data file, select “USE FILE”
in step 4.
After procedure 6. MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-1>
HD: m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
1 Press the [F3](NEZ) key. [F3] N> 0.000 m
Direct key input display will be shown. E: 0.000 m
Z: 0.000 m
INPUT ––– PT# ENTER
2 Press the [F3](PT#) key to use coordinate data [F3] MLM-1(A-B,A-C)
file. PT#:__________
Point number input display will be shown.
Pressing the [F3](HD) key, the display will return
INPUT LIST HD ENTER
to procedure 6.

After selecting coordinate input mode by pressing

the [F3](NEZ or PT# or HD) key, press the
[F1](INPUT) key and enter the data.

6-7
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.1.3 Setting Z Coordinate of Occupied Point

Occupied point coordinate data and known point actual measuring data are utilized, z coordinate of
occupied point is calculated and reset again.
Known point data and coordinate data can use the coordinate data file.

1) Setting occupied coordinate

[Example setting] Using coordinate data file.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing [MENU] key, press [F4](P↓) key to [MENU] MENU 2/3
get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F3](Z COORD.) key. [F3] Z COORD.SETTING
F1:USE FILE
F2:DON’T USE

4 Press the [F1](USE FILE) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE

FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

5 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter the File [F1]
Name. Enter FN
[F4] Z COORD.SETTING
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:REF.MEAS

6 Press the [F1] key. [F1] OCC.PT

PT#:_________

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

7 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter the Point [F1] INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
number. Instrument height setting display will be Enter PT# INPUT
shown. [F4] INS.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
8 Enter the height. Enter HT Z COORD.SETTING
[F4] F1:OCC.PT INPUT
The display returns to Z coordinate menu.
F2:REF.MEAS

z For more information about data file, see Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE” .

6-8
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

2) Z Coordinate Calculation from Known Point Measuring Data

[Example setting] Using coordinate data file

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing [MENU] key, press [F4](P↓) key to [MENU] MENU 2/3
get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F3](Z COORD.) key. [F3] Z COORD.SETTING
F1:USE FILE
F2:DON’T USE

4 Press the [F1](USE FILE) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE

FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

5 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter the File [F1]
Name. Enter FN
[F4] Z COORD.SETTING
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:REF.MEAS

6 Press the [F2] key. [F2] NOO1#

PT#:_________

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

7 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter the Point [F1] N: 4.356 m
Number in coordinate data file. Enter PT# E: 16.283 m
[F4] Z: 1.553 m
>OK ? [YES][NO]
8 Press the [F3](YES) key and enter the Point [F3] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
Number in coordinate data file. INPUT
R.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
9 Enter the height. Enter R. HT REFLECTOR HEIGHT
[F4] INPUT
R.HT: 0.000 m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
10 Collimate a prism on the point and press the Collimate P HR: 120°30'40"
[F1](MEAS) key. [F1] HD*[n] << m
Measuring starts. *1)
VD: m
>Measuring...

6-9
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

HR: 120°30'40"
HD: 12.345 m
VD: 23.456 m
NEXT ––– ––– CALC
11 Press the [F4](CALC) key.*2) [F4] Z COORD. SETTING
Z : Z coordinate Z : 1.234 m
dZ: Standard deviation
dZ : 0.002 m
––– ––– BS SET
12 Press the [F4](SET) key. *3) [F4] BACKSIGHT
Z coordinate of the occupied point will be set. HR: 23°20'40"
Bascksight point measuring screen will be shown.
>OK? [YES][NO]
13 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] PROGRAMS 1/2
Horizontal angle will be set. F1:REM
The display returns to Programs 1/2 menu.
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓

*1) Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.

*2) To measure other points, press the [F1](NEXT) key.
*3) Pressing the [F3] key, the display will be changed alternately.

6-10
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.1.4 Area Calculation

This mode calculate the area of a closed figure.
There are two area calculation methods as follows.
1) Area Calculation from Coordinate data file
2) Area Calculation from Measured data

z Area is not calculated correctly if enclosed lines cross each other.

z It is impossible to calculate what a mix of coordinate file data and measured data.
z If the coordinate data file does not exist, the area calculation from measured data is done
automatically.
z The numbers of points used to calculate are not limited.

1) Area Calculation from Coordinate Data File

Operating procedure Operation Display
1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2/3. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F4](P↓) key to get the PROGRAMS [F4] PROGRAMS 2/2
menu on page 2/2. F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
P↓
4 Press the [F1](AREA) key. [F1] AREA
F1:FILE DATA
F2:MEASUREMENT

5 Press the [F1](FILE DATA) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE

FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

6 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter the File [F1] AREA 0000
Name. Enter FN m.sq
Initial display will be shown. [F4] NEXT# :DATA-01
PT# LIST UNIT NEXT
7 Press the [F4](NEXT) key. *1),2) [F4] AREA 0001
The top of the file data (DATA-01) will be set and m.sq
the second point number will be shown.
NEXT# :DATA-02
PT# LIST UNIT NEXT
8 Repeat pressing the [F4](NEXT) key to set [F4]
required number of points.

6-11
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

When 3 or more points are set, the area AREA 0021

surrounded by the points is calculated and the
123.456 m.sq
result will be shown.
NEXT# :DATA-22
PT# LIST UNIT NEXT

*1) To set specify point, press the [F1](PT#) key.

*2) To show the list of the coordinate data in the file, press the [F2](LIST) key.

2) Area Calculation from Measured Data

Operating procedure Operation Display
1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2/3. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F4](P↓) key to get the PROGRAMS [F4] PROGRAMS 2/2
menu on page 2/2. F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
P↓
4 Press the [F1](AREA) key. [F1] AREA
F1:FILE DATA
F2:MEASUREMENT

5 Press the [F2](MEASUREMENT) key. [F2] AREA

F1:USE G.F.
F2:DON’T USE

6 Press the [F1] or [F2] key to select using GRID [F2] AREA 0000
FACTOR. m.sq
[Example:F2 : DON’T USE]
MEAS ––– UNIT NP/P
7 Collimate a prism and press the [F1](MEAS) key. Collimate P N*[n] <<< m
Measuring starts. *1) [F1] E: m
Z: m
>Measuring...

AREA 0001
m.sq

MEAS ––– UNIT NP/P

8 Collimate next point and press the [F1](MEAS) Collimate
key. [F1]

6-12
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

When 3 or more points are measured, the area AREA 0003

surrounded by the points is calculated and the
234.567 m.sq
result will be shown.

MEAS ––– UNIT NP/P

*1) Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.

z To change the display unit

It is possible to change the displayed area unit.

Operating procedure Operation Display

AREA 0003
100.000 m.sq

MEAS ––– UNIT NP/P

1 Press the [F3](UNIT) key. [F3] AREA 0003
100.000 m.sq

m.sq ha ft.sq acre

2 Select a unit by pressing the [F1] to [F4] key. [F2] AREA 0003
Example: [F2](ha) key. 0.010 ha

MEAS ––– UNIT NP/P

z m.sq : square meter ha : hectare ft.sq : square feet acre : acre.

6-13
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.1.5 Point to Line Measurement

This mode is used to obtain the coordinate data with the origin point A(0,0,0) and the line AB as N
axis.
Place the 2 prisms at the points A and B on the line, and place the instrument at unknown point C. After
measuring the 2 prisms , the coordinate data and the direction angle of the instrument will be calculated
and restored.

P(n, e, z)

Prism P1 Prism P2

R.HT
Line

INS.HT Instrument Point (Unknown point)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2/3. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PROGRAMS 1/2
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD. P↓
3 Press the [F4](P↓) key to get the PROGRAMS [F4] PROGRAMS 2/2
menu on page 2/2. F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
P↓
4 Press the [F2] key. [F2] INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Enter instrument height. Enter REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INS.HT INPUT
[F4] R.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
6 Enter reflector A(P1) height. Enter R.HT POINT TO LINE
[F4] MEAS.P1
HD: m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––

6-14
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

7 Collimate prism P1 (Origin) and press [F1](MEAS) Collimate POINT TO LINE

key. P1 MEAS.P1
Measuring starts. *1) [F1] HD*[n] << m
>Measuring...

Input display of reflector B(P2) height will be REFLECTOR HEIGHT

shown. INPUT
R.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
8 Enter reflector B(P2) height. Enter R. HT POINT TO LINE
[F4] MEAS.P2
HD: m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
9 Collimate prism B (P2)(Origin) and press the Collimate POINT TO LINE
[F1](MEAS) key. P2 MEAS.P2
Measuring starts. *1) [F1] HD*[n] << m
>Measuring...
The coordinate data and the direction angle of the
instrument are calculated and restored. DIST. (P1-P2) 1/2
The result (The distance between A and B) will be dHD: 10.000 m
displayed.
dVD: 0.000 m
dHD: Horizontal distance
dVD:Vertical distance
NEZ S.CO ––– P↓
dSD:Slope distance *2) ,3)
10 Press [F1](NEZ) key to measure other points. [F1] N: 0.000 m
E: 0.000 m
Z: 0.000 m
MEAS R.HT NP/P –––
11 Collimate a prism and press [F1](MEAS) key. >Measuring...
Collimate P
Coordinate measurement starts. *4) [F1]
The result will be shown. *5) N: 3.456 m
E: 5.432 m
Z: 0.000 m
MEAS R.HT NP/P –––

*1) Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.

*2) To show dSD, press [F4](P↓) key.
*3) To show the new occupied data, press [F2](S.CO) key.
*4) Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.
*5) To return to previous mode, press the [ESC] key.

6-15
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.2 Setting the GRID FACTOR

GRID FACTOR can reset in this menu mode.
For more information, refer to Section 8.1.1 “Setting the GRID FACTOR”.

Grid Factor can be applied to the following application programs.

It is also possible to cancel the Grid factor function by selecting "DON'T USE" in “SELECTING MODE”.
At this time the setting and selecting screens for Grid Factor will be omitted.

z Data collection mode

When the NEZ automatic calculation (NEZ AUTO. CALC) is ON, Grid factor will be applied to the
coordinate data (Including PTL data) recorded into a coordinate data file when the RAW data is
measured and recorded. (In this case, Grid Factor is not applied to the RAW data recorded into the
measured data file.)

PTL (Point To Line measurement)

When executing PTL measurement mode, the NEZ Auto Calculation will be turned on compulsorily and
Grid factor will be applied to the coordinate data.

z Layout
Execution Layout (Including PTL measurement mode)

1. When displaying the difference (dHD) between grid horizontal distance to a layout point (HDg) on
the projection plane and measured ground horizontal distance to a prism point (HD), Grid factor will be
applied to grid distance (HDg) in order to reverse-convert grid distance to ground distance.

2. After completion of a layout point, the displayed coordinate data will be applied to grid factor in order
to compare with surveying data and calculated data on the projection plane.

(NEW POINT-Side Shot)

In side shot method, a new point coordinate data will be applied to grid factor and the new point
coordinate data will be recorded into a coordinate data file.

(NEW POINT - Resection)

In resection method, when a new point calculated coordinate data is displayed or recorded, the new
point coordinate data will be applied to grid factor and the coordinate data will be recorded into a
coordinate data file.

z MLM (Missing Line Measurement)

When selecting grid factor "USE G.F.", measured data will be applied to grid factor. At this time,
horizontal distance (dHD) and slope distance (dSD) will be on the projection plane.

z AREA (Area calculation / Measured method)

When selecting grid factor "USE G.F.", measured data will be applied to grid factor. At this time, the
calculated area will be on the projection plane.

Note: Calculation of Z coordinate is not influenced even if it is applied to grid factor.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 2/3
key to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F3](GRID FACTOR) key. [F3] GRID FACTOR
=0.998843

>MODIFY? [YES][NO]

6-16
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

3 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] GRID FACTOR

ELEV.=1000 m
SCALE:0.999000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter Elevation. *1) Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter ELEV.
[F4]

5 Enter Scale Factor in the same way. Enter Scale GRID FACTOR
[F4] ELEV.:2000 m
SCALE=1.001000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Grid Factor is displayed for 1 to 2 second and GRID FACTOR
display returns to menu.
=1.000686

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input Range :Elevation : –9,999 to +9,999 meter (–32,805 to +3,2805 ft, ft+in)
Scale Factor: 0.990000 to 1.010000

6.3 Setting Illumination of Display and Cross Hairs

Setting ON/OFF/LEVEL (1 to 9) for illumination of display (LCD) and reticle.
Setting LEVEL (1 to 9) is only for reticle.
[Example setting] LEVEL:2 and turn on the illumination.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F1] key. [F1] ILLUMINATION [OFF:1]
The data previously set is shown. F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL
3 Press the [F3](LEVEL) key. [F3] ILLUMINATION [OFF:1]
[LEVEL MODE]

↓ ↑ ––– ENTER
4 Press the [F2](↑) key, and then press the [F2]
[F4](ENTER) key. [F4] ILLUMINATION [OFF:2]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL
5 Press the [F1](ON) key. [F1] ILLUMINATION [ON:2]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL

z To return to previous mode, press the [ESC] key.

6-17
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.4 Setting Mode 1

In this mode, the following settings are possible.
1. Setting Minimum Reading
2. Auto Power off
3. Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt Correction (Tilt ON/OFF)
(GPT-3207N/NW has vertical angle tilt correction only.)
4. Systematic Error of Instrument Correction (GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW)
5. Selecting battery type
6. Heater ON/OFF
7. Setting for RS-232C communication
8. Selecting Communication Port
9. Confirming the Bluetooth Device Address and Setting the PIN code
z This setting is memorized after power off.

6.4.1 Setting Minimum Reading

Select minimum display unit for angle measurement, coarse distance measurement mode.
z To select minimum display for fine measurement mode, see Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” .

Models Angle Unit Coarse mode

Degree GON MIL Distance unit
GPT-3202N/NW
GPT-3203N/NW 5" / 1" 1mgon / 0.2mgon 0.1mil / 0.01mil
GPT-3205N/NW 10mm (0.02ft)/
1mm(0.005ft)
GPT-3207N/NW 10" / 5" 2mgon / 1mgon 0.1mil / 0.01mil

[Example] Minimum angle : 5”, Coarse : 1mm

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F1] key. [F1] MINIMUM READING
F1:ANGLE
F2:COARSE

4 Press the [F1] key. [F1] MINIMUM ANGLE

[F1: 1" ]
F2: 5"
ENTER
5 Press the [F2](5") key and press the [F4](ENTER) [F2] MINIMUM READING
key. [F4] F1:ANGLE
F2:COARSE

6 Press the [F2] key. [F2] COARSE READING

F1: 1mm
[F2:10mm]
ENTER

6-18
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

7 Press the [F1] key and press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F1] MINIMUM READING
[F4] F1:ANGLE
F2:COARSE

z To return to previous mode, press the [ESC] key.

6.4.2 Auto Power Off

If no key operation is given or no process of measurement is performed for more than 30 minutes (No
change exceeding 30” has occurred during horizontal angle or vertical angle measurement.), the power
turns off automatically. If the instrument is set at distance measurement mode (No change in distance
exceeding 10cm has occurred during distance measurement), the mode changes to angle
measurement automatically in case that the instrument does not operate for approximately 10 minutes,
and the power turns off after 20 minutes.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F2] key. [F2] AUTO POWER OFF [OFF]
The data previously set is shown. F1:ON
F2:OFF
ENTER
4 Press the [F1](ON) key or [F2](OFF) key, and [F1] or [F2]
press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6-19
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.4.3 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)

(GPT-3207N/NW has vertical angle tilt correction only.)
In case the instrument is used in an unstable situation, constant indexing of vertical and horizontal
angle may be impossible. In this case, the function of tilt correction can be stopped by selecting TILT
OFF. It has been set to X,Y (V/H) TILT ON at the factory.
z This setting is memorized after powering off.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/2
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F3] key. [F3] TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
The data previously set is shown. X: 0°02'10"
If already ON, the display shows tilt correction
Y: 0°03'00"
value.
X-ON XY-ON OFF ENTER
4 Press the [F1](X-ON) key or [F2](XY-ON) or [F1]~[F3]
[F3](OFF) key, and press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6.4.4 Systematic Error of Instrument Correction

(Only for GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW)
Setting ON/OFF for error correction of collimation and horizontal axis for angle measurement.
Note: Perform this item after complete Section 17.5 “Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of
Instrument”.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F4] key. [F4] PARAMETERS 1 2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:BATTERY TYPE
F3:HEATER P↓
4 Press the [F1] key. [F1] ERROR CORR. [OFF]
The data previously set is shown. F1:ON
F2:OFF
ENTER
5 Press the [F1](ON) key or [F2](OFF) key, and [F1] or [F2]
press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6-20
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.4.5 Selecting Battery Type

On-board battery BT-32Q can be also available for GPT-3200N/NW series. When you use BT-32Q (Ni-
Cd) battery, select [Ni-Cd] type of battery in this parameters 1 menu.
If you select wrong type of battery, the battery remaining display may work incorrectly.

BT-52QA : Ni-MH battery type, BT-32Q : Ni-Cd battery type.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3/3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key and press the [F4](P↓) key to [F2] PARAMETERS 1 2/3
get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:BATTERY TYPE
F3:HEATER P↓
3 Press the [F2] key. [F2] BATTERY TYPE
[F1:Ni-MH ]
F2:Ni-Cd
ENTER
4 Press the [F2] key to select Ni-Cd battery type. [F2]
Then press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6.4.6 Heater ON/OFF

The heater option for both display units can be turned OFF or ON.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F4] key. [F4] PARAMETERS 1 2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:BATTERY TYPE
F3:HEATER P↓
4 Press the [F3] key. [F3] HEATER [OFF]
The data previously set is shown. F1:ON
F2:OFF
ENTER
5 Press the [F1](ON) key or [F2](OFF) key, and [F1] or [F2]
press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6-21
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.4.7 Setting RS-232C communication with external device

you can set the parameters for RS-232C communication with external device from parameters setting
menu .
The following parameters can be set.

Item Selecting items

Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400

Character bit/Parity 7/Even, 7/Odd, 8/None
Stop bit 1, 2
ACK mode Standard, Omitted
CR,LF ON, OFF
REC type REC-A, REC-B
Baud rate: 1200 baud rate, Character bit/Parity:7/Even, CRLF:OFF,
Factory setting
REC type: REC-A, ACK:Standard

ACK mode, CRLF and REC type are interlocked with the same items in the selecting mode.
Refer to 16 “SELECTING MODE”

Sample setting
STOP BITS: 2

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 2. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F4] key twice. [F4] twice PARAMETERS 1 3/3
F1:RS-232C

P↓
4 Press the [F1] key. [F1] RS-232C 1/3
The data previously set is shown. F1:BAUD RATE
F2:CHAR./PARITY
F3:STOP BITS P↓
5 Press the [F3] key to select STOP BITS. [F3] STOP BITS
The data previously set is marked. [F1:1 ]
F2:2
ENTER
6 Press the [F2](2) key to select stop bit 2, and [F2]
press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6-22
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.4.8 Selecting Communication Port (Only for built-in Bluetooth model)

You can change the communication port to BLUETOOTH port.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F4] key. [F4] PARAMETERS 1 2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:BATTERY TYPE
F3:HEATER P↓
4 Press the [F4] key. [F4] PARAMETERS 1 3/3
F1:RS-232C
F2:SELECT COM
F3:BLUETOOTH P↓
5 Press the [F2] key. [F2] SELECT COM
F1:BLUETOOTH
[F2:RS-232C]
ENTER
6 Press the [F1](BLUETOOTH) key to select the [F1] SELECT COM
communication port and press the [F4](ENTER) [F4] [F1:BLUETOOTH]
key.
F2:RS-232C
The display will return to the previous menu.
ENTER

6-23
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.4.9 Confirming the Bluetooth Device Address and Setting the PIN code
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
You can confirm the Bluetooth address and set the PIN code

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] PARAMETERS 1 1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT P↓
3 Press the [F4] key. [F4] PARAMETERS 1 2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:BATTERY TYPE
F3:HEATER P↓
4 Press the [F4] key. [F4] PARAMETERS 1 3/3
F1:RS-232C
F2:SELECT COM
F3:BLUETOOTH P↓
5 Press the [F3] key. [F3] BLUETOOTH
The Bluetooth device address and PIN code will ADDR. :0000E14F49B4
display.
PIN CODE : 1234
INPUT NONE --- ENTER
6 To change the PIN code, press the [F1](INPUT) [F1] BLUETOOTH
key. ADDR. :0000E14F49B4
7 Enter a new PIN code and press the [F4](ENTER) Enter PIN PIN CODE = 2233
key. code --- --- [CLR][ENT]
[F4]

z To communicate between the GPT-3200NW and Bluetooth-enabled instrument, it is necessary to

make the PIN codes of both instruments identical.
If two PIN codes don’t coincide, the two instrument cannot communicate each other.
z For setting the PIN code of Bluetooth-enabled instrument, see the instrument’s instruction manual.
z If you do not use the PIN code, choose “NONE.” (The factory default setting is “NONE.”)

6-24
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.5 Setting Contrast of Display

Setting level for contrast of display (LCD)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓) [MENU] MENU 3/3
key twice to get the menu on page 3. [F4] F1:ILLUMINATION
[F4] F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:CONTRAST ADJ.P↓
2 Press the [F3] key. [F3] CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
LEVEL: 4

↓ ↑ ––– ENTER
3 Press the [F1](↓) key or [F2](↑) key, and press the [F1]or [F2]
[F4](ENTER) key. [F4]

6-25
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.6 ROAD
z Road menu operation
PROGRAMS 2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD P↓
Press F3 key
ROAD
F1:INPUT DATA
F2:SETOUT
F3:INITIALIZE
Input start point
F1 INPUT DATA START POINT
F1:START POINT F1 N > 0.000 m
F2:H ALIGNMENT E : 0.000 m
INPUT --- --- ENTER

Input road data

H ALIGNMENT F1:LINE LINE 01
F1 F1
F2
F1:DATA INPUT F2:CURVE L > 0.000 m
F2:DATA SEARCH F3:SPIRAL AZ: 0°00’00”
F4:POINT INPUT --- --- ENTER

CURVE 02
F2 R > 0.000 m
L : 0.000 m
INPUT --- --- ENTER

SPIRAL 03
F3 R > 0.000 m
L : 0.000 m
INPUT --- --- ENTER

POINT 04
F4 N > 0.000 m
E : 0.000 m
INPUT --- --- ENTER

Search data Edit data

DATA SEARCH LINE 01/30
F1:FIRST DATA F1 L : 100.000 m
F2 F2:LAST DATA AZ: 45°00’00”
EDIT

Set OCC and BS

SETOUT OCC&BS OCC&BS
F2 F1 F1
F1:OCC&BS F1:OCC&BS F1:COORD. DATA
F2:SETOUT ROAD F2:RESECTION F2:ROAD DATA
F3:SELECT A FILE

Set out road Resection

SETOUT ROAD NO01#
F2 CHAIN:1000.000 PT#:__________
F2
INPUT --- --- ENTER INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

Select a file
SELECT A FILE
FN:__________
F3
INPUT LIST --- ENTER

Initialize ROAD data

INITIALIZE DATA
F3 ERASE ROAD DATA

>OK ? [NO][YES]

6-26
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.6.1 Input Start Point

To input the start point, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4] key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F1], [F1] key. [F3] START POINT
(Refer to “Input start point” on page 6-26.) [F1] N = 0.000 m
[F1] E : 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Input coord N, E. Input coord START POINT
4 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT] CHAIN = 0.000 m
INTERVAL:100.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Input value data CHAIN, INTERVAL. Input data
6 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT]
<SET!>

INPUT DATA
F1:START POINT
F2:H ALIGNMENT

z For [ROAD], in addition to the “Start Point” and “Road Data” input files, other files necessary for the
calculations are created. Consequently, if the free area of the memory reaches 10% or less, a
“MEMORY POOR” warning message is displayed. (In this case, the instrument can still be operated.)

z CHAIN and INTERVAL input range

-50,000m≤CHAIN≤+500,000m
0m<INTERVAL≤+5,000m

6-27
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.6.2 Input Road Data

[ROAD] is made up of four types of components: LINE, CURVE, SPIRAL and POINT.
To input the required components, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4]key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F1], [F2],[F1] key. [F3] F1:LINE
(Refer to “Input road data” on page 6-26.) [F1] F2:CURVE
[F2] F3:SPIRAL
[F1] F4:POINT
z The amount of input data varies depending on the type of data, up to a maximum of 30.
(In the case of POINT input only, the maximum is 9 points including end point.)

z An error may occur when entering a combination of POINT and other components if the amount of data
entered exceeds the maximum amount allowed for internal calculations. If this happens, please reduce
the amount of input data.

z Input LINE data

Operating procedure Operation Display

F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input LINE data, press the [F1] key. *1) [F1] LINE 01
L = 0.000 m
AZ: 0°00’00”
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
2 Input LENGTH. Input LINE 01
3 Press the [ENT] key. LENGTH L : 100.000 m
AZ= 0°00’00”
[ENT] --- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Input AZIMUTH. Input
5 Press the [ENT] key. AZIMUTH

[ENT]

<SET!>

*1) The number at the top right of the screen shows the amount of data currently entered.

6-28
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

z Input CURVE data

Operating procedure Operation Display

F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input CURVE data, press the [F2] key. *1) [F2] CURVE 02
R = 0.000 m
L : 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
2 Input RADIUS. Input CURVE 02
3 Press the [ENT] key. RADIUS R : 100.000 m
[ENT] L = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
4 Input LENGTH. LENGTH
5 Press the [ENT] key.
[ENT]

Select
CURVE 02
6 Select TURN(direction of turn): RIGHT or LEFT. [F1](LEFT)
or TURN > RIGHT
7 Press the [ENT] key.
[F2](RIGHT)
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
[ENT]

<SET!>

*1) CURVE cannot be input as the first data.

6-29
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

z Input SPIRAL data

Operating procedure Operation Display

F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input SPIRAL data, press the [F3] key. *1) [F3] SPIRAL 03
R = 0.000 m
L : 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
2 Input RADIUS. Input SPIRAL 03
3 Press the [ENT] key. RADIUS R : 100.000 m
[ENT] L = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
4 Input LENGTH. LENGTH
5 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT]

Select
6 Select TURN(direction of turn): RIGHT or LEFT. [F1](LEFT) SPIRAL 03
or TURN > RIGHT
7 Press the [ENT] key.
[F2](RIGHT) DIR : IN
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
[ENT]

8 Select DIR(direction): IN(entrance) or OUT(exit). Select SPIRAL 03

9 Press the [ENT] key. [F1](IN) TURN : LEFT
or DIR > IN
[F2](OUT) IN OUT --- ENTER
[ENT]

<SET!>

*1) SPIRAL cannot be input as the first data.

6-30
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

z Input POINT data

Operating procedure Operation Display

F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input POINT data, press the [F4] key. [F4] POINT 04
N = 0.000 m
E : 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
2 Input N coord. Input POINT 04
3 Press the [ENT] key. N coord N : 100.000 m
[ENT] E = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

R > 0.000 m
4 Input E coord. Input
A1: 0.000
5 Press the [ENT] key. E coord
[ENT] A2: 0.000
INPUT --- SKIP ENTER

6 Input RADIUS. *1) Input R : 100.000 m

RADIUS A1> 0.000
7 Press the [ENT] key.
[ENT] A2: 0.000
INPUT --- SKIP ENTER
Input R : 100.000 m
8 Input parameter A1. *1) parameter
9 Press the [ENT] key. A1: 80.000
A1 A2> 0.000
[ENT]
INPUT --- SKIP ENTER

10 Input parameter A2. *1) Input

11 Press the [ENT] key. parameter
A2
[ENT]

<SET!>

*1) If the data input is not required, press the [SKIP] key.

z When inputting POINT data, if the next data is not POINT data, ROAD is calculated as a straight line
irrespective of the values for RADIUS, A1 and A2.

6-31
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.6.3 Search Data

To search for input data, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4]key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F1], [F2], [F2] key. [F3] DATA SEARCH
(Refer to “Search data” on page 6-26.) [F1] F1:FIRST DATA
[F2] F2:LAST DATA
[F2]

3 To search from the first data, select [F1] (FIRST [F1] LINE 01/30
DATA). L : 100.000 m
AZ: 45°00’00”
EDIT ↓
4 To switch to different data, press the [↓] or [↑] key. [↓] or [↑]

SPIRAL 30/30
R : 200.000 m
L : 100.000 m
EDIT ↓

6.6.4 Edit Data

To edit input data, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

LINE 01/30
L : 100.000 m
AZ: 45°00’00”
EDIT ↓
1 In DATA SEARCH, press the [F1] key. [F1] LINE 01
L = 100.000 m
AZ: 45°00’00”
2 Edit the data. Edit --- --- [CLR] [ENT]
data

6-32
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.6.5 Set OCC and BS

To set the Occupied Point and Backsight Point, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4]key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F2], [F1] key. [F3] OCC&BS
(Refer to “Set OCC and BS” on page 6-26.) [F2] F1:OCC&BS
[F1] F2:RESECTION

3 Press the [F1] key. *1) [F1] OCC&BS

F1:COORD. DATA
F2:ROAD DATA

4 To input OCC. PT, press [F2] OCC.PT

the [F1](COORD. DATA)or [F2](ROAD DATA) key. CHAIN=
COORD. DATA:
Choose the data from Coord Data and set the
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Occupied Point.

ROAD DATA:
Create the data from Road Data and set the
Occupied Point.

(Example : ROAD DATA)

5 Input OCC. PT, press the [ENT] key. Input CHAIN:1000.000
OCC. PT >CENTER
[ENT] LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
6 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT] CHAIN:1000.000
N : 0.000 m
LEFT or RIGHT: Use the offset point.
E : 0.000 m
CENTER: Use the center point.
>OK ? [YES][NO]
(Example : CENTER)
7 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] BACKSIGHT
CHAIN=

--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

8 Input the backsight. Input
Backsight

9 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT]

CHAIN: 0.000
>CENTER

LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER

6-33
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

10 Collimate the backsight. Collimate BACKSIGHT

Backsight H(B)= 45°00’00”

>Sight? [YES][NO]
11 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3]

<SET!>

SETOUT
F1:OCC&BS
F2:SETOUT ROAD
F3:SELECT A FILE

*1) When setting the Occupied Point and Backsight Point using Resection method, select [F2]
(RESECTION).
For details of the Resection method, refer to Section 8.3.2 “Resection Method”.

6-34
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

6.6.6 Setout Road

To setout the road, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4]key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F2], [F2] key. [F3] SETOUT ROAD
(Refer to “Set out road” on page 6-26.) [F2] CHAIN=
[F2]
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Input data. Input SETOUT ROAD
data CHAIN=1200

--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

4 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT] CHAIN:1200
> CENTER

LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER

5 Select offset. [F2] CHAIN:1200
(Example: RIGHT) : RIGHT
Press the [F2] key. *1)
= m
--- --- [CLR][ENT]
6 Input the offset value. Input
offset value

7 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT]

CHAIN:1200
The setout point coordinates are displayed. N : 0.000 m
E : 0.000 m
>OK ? [YES][NO]
8 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] CALCULATED
The distance to the setout point and the backsight HR= 60°00’00”
are displayed.
HD= 100.000 m
HR: Calculated horizontal angle of the layout point
ANGLE DIST --- ---
HD: Calculated horizontal distance from the
instrument to the layout point
9 Press the [F1](ANG) key. [F1] CHAIN:1200
CHAIN: Layout point HR: 60°00’00”
HR: Measured (Actual) horizontal angle.
dHR: 0°00’00”
dHR: Horizontal angle to be turned to the layout
point = Actual horizontal angle - Calculated
DIST --- NEZ ---
horizontal angle.
Correct direction when dHR = 0°00'00"
10 Press the [F1](DIST) key. [F1] HD* 100.000 m
HD: Measuring (Actual) horizontal distance dHD: 0.000 m
dHD: Horizontal distance to be turned to the
layout point = Actual horizontal distance –
Calculated horizontal distance.
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT

6-35
 6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)

11 Press the [F3](NEZ) key. [F3] N * 70.000 m

The coordinate data is shown. E : 50.000 m

MODE ANG NP/P NEXT

12 Press the [F4](NEXT) key to set next layout point. [F4]

*1) If not selecting offset, press the [ENT] key.

6.6.7 Select a File

To set the coordinates to be used for the Occupied Point and Backsight Point, carry out the following
operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4]key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F2] key. [F3] SETOUT
(Refer to “Select a file” on page 6-26.) [F2] F1:OCC&BS
F2:SETOUT ROAD
F3:SELECT A FILE
3 Press the [F3] key. [F3] SELECT A FILE
FN:__________

INPUT LIST --- ENTER

4 Enter the name of the file being used (or select it Select a file
from the list).

5 Press the [ENT] key. [ENT]

6.6.8 Initialize ROAD data

To initialize the data, carry out the following operating procedure.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 After pressing the [MENU] key, press the [F4](P↓), [MENU] PROGRAMS 2/2
[F2], [F4]key to get the programs menu on page [F4] F1:AREA
2/2. [F2] F2:POINT TO LINE
[F4] F3:ROAD P↓
2 Press the [F3], [F3] key. [F3] INITIALIZE DATA
(Refer to “Initialize ROAD data” on page 6-26.) [F3] ERASE ROAD DATA

>OK ? [NO][YES]
3 When the [F4] (YES) key is pressed, all ROAD
DATA with the exception of the coordinate data file
is erased.
[F4]
Press the [F4] key.

6-36
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7 DATA COLLECTION
The GPT-3200N/NW is able to store the measured data into the internal memory.
The internal memory is shared by the measured data files and the coordinate data files.
z Measured data
The collected data is memorized into a files.
z The number of measurement points
(In case not using the internal memory in layout mode)
MAX. 24,000 points

Because the internal memory covers both data collection mode and layout mode, the number of
measurement points will be decreased when the layout mode is used.
For the internal memory, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.

1) When turning off the power, ensure that you are in the main menu screen or main angle
measurement mode.
This ensures completion of the memory access process and avoids possible damage to the
stored data.
2) It is recommended for safety to charge the battery (BT-52QA) beforehand and prepare fully
charged spare batteries.

7-1
 7 DATA COLLECTION

z Data collect menu operation

By pressing the [MENU] key, the instrument will be in MENU 1/3 mode.
Press the [F2] (DATA COLLECT) key, the menu of data collect 1/2 will be shown.

Normal measurement mode

[ESC] [MENU]
MENU 1/3
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
[F2]
SELECT A FILE Selecting data collection file
FN:

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

Set file

DATA COLLECT 1/2

F1:OCC.PT# INPUT [ESC] [F1]
F2:BACKSIGHT OCC.PT# INPUT
F3:FS/SS P↓ Setting occupied point
See Section 7.1.3 “Occupied Point and
DATA COLLECTION MENU 1/2 Backsight Point”.
[F2]
BACKSIGHT
Setting direction angle
See Section 7.1.3 “Occupied Point and
[F4] Backsight Point”.
[F3]
FS/SS
Executing data collection
See section 7.2 “Operational Procedure of
DATA COLLECT 2/2
[ESC] [F1] DATA COLLECT”
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT SELECT A FILE
F3:CONFIG. P↓ File can be selected for Data collect.
See Section 7.1.1 “Selecting a File for Data
DATA COLLECTION MENU 2/2 Collection”.
[F2]
PCODE INPUT
Editing PCODE library
See Section 7.6 “Editing PCODE Library
[PCODE INPUT]”
[F3]
CONFIG
Setting Parameter of Data Collect
See Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data
Collect [CONFIG.]”.

7-2
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.1 Preparation
7.1.1 Selecting a File for Data Collection
A file used by data collection mode must be selected at first.
Select a file before beginning data collection mode because selection screen of a file is displayed. And
a selection from data collection menu is possible in the mode.

Operating procedure Operation Display

MENU 1/3
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
1 Press [F2](DATA COLLECT) key from menu 1/3. [F2] SELECT A FILE
FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

2 Press [F2](LIST) key to display the list of file. *1) [F2] AMIDATA /M0123
→*HILDATA /M0345
TOPDATA /M0789
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
3 Scroll file list by pressing [ ] or [ ] key and [ ] or [ ] TOPDATA /M0789
select a file to use. *2),3) →RAPDATA /M0564
SATDATA /M0456
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
4 Press [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] DATA COLLECT 1/2
The file will be set and data collect 1/2 menu will F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
be shown.
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS P↓

*1) If you want to make a new file or input file name directly, press [F1](INPUT) key and enter a file name.
*2) When a file has been selected already, '*' mark is indicated on left of current file name.
*3) Data in a file shown with arrow can be searched by pressing [F2](SRCH) key.

zIt is possible to select a file from DATA COLLECT 2/2 menu in the
DATA COLLECT 2/2
same way.
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG. P↓

7-3
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.1.2 Selecting a Coordinate File for Data Collection

When coordinate data in a coordinate data file are used for occupied point or backsight point, select a
coordinate file from the data collect menu 2/2 beforehand.

Operating procedure Operation Display

DATA COLLECT 2/2

F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG. P↓
1 Press the [F1](SELECT A FILE) key from DATA [F1] SELECT A FILE
COLLECT menu 2/2. F1:MEAS.DATA
F2:COORD.DATA

2 Press the [F2](COORD.DATA) key. [F2] SELECT A FILE

FN:

INPUT LIST --- ENTER

3 Select a coordinate file in the same manner as
Section 7.1.1 “Selecting a File for Data Collection”.

7.1.3 Occupied Point and Backsight Point

The occupied point and direction angle in the data collect mode are linked with the occupied point and
direction angle in normal coordinate measurement.
It is possible to set or change the occupied point and direction angle from the data collect mode.

Occupied point can be set by two setting methods as follow.

1) Setting from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
2) Direct key input.

The following three setting methods for backsight point can be selected.
1) Setting from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
2) Direct key input of coordinate data.
3) Direct key input of setting angle.

Note: See 9.4 “Coordinate Data Direct Key Input” and 9.7.2 “Loading Data” for how to store
coordinate into the internal memory.

z Example for setting the occupied point:

In case of setting occupied point from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F1](OCC.PT# INPUT) key from the [F1] PT# → PT-01
data collect menu 1/2. ID :
The previous data is shown.
INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
2 Press the [F4] (OCNEZ) key. [F4] OCC.PT
PT#:PT-01

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

3 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#.*1) [F1] N: 0.000m
Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter PT# E: 0.000m
[F4] Z: 0.000m
>OK? [YES] [NO]

7-4
 7 DATA COLLECTION

4 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] PT# → PT-11

ID :
INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
5 Enter ID, INS.HT in the same way. *2),3) Enter ID, PT# :PT-11
INS.HT ID :
INS.HT→ 1.335 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
6 Press [F3](REC) key. >REC ? [YES][NO]
[F3]

7 Press [F3](YES) key. [F3] DATA COLLECT 1/2

The display returns to the data collect menu 1/2. F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS P↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) ID can be input by inputting a register number linked with PCODE Library.
To show the list of PCODE library, press the [F2](SRCH) key.
*3) Press the [F3](REC) key when you do not input the INS.HT.
z The data recorded in data collect is PT#, ID and INS.HT.
z If point is not found in internal memory "PT# DOES NOT EXIST" is displayed.

7-5
 7 DATA COLLECTION

z Example for setting the direction angle:

The following is to memorize the data of the backsight after setting the backsight point from point
number.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F2](BACKSIGHT) key from the data [F2] BS# →
collect menu 1/2. PCODE :
The previous data is shown.
R.HT : 0.000 m
INPUT 0SET MEAS BS
2 Press the [F4] (BS) key. *1) [F4] BACKSIGHT
PT#:

INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT

3 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#. *2) [F1] N: 0.000m
Enter PT# E: 0.000m
[F4] Z: 0.000m
>OK? [YES] [NO]
4 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] BS# → PT-22
PCODE :
R.HT : 0.000 m
Enter PCODE,R.HT in the same way. *3),4)
INPUT 0SET MEAS BS
5 Press the [F3](MEAS) key. [F3] BS# → PT-22
PCODE :
R.HT : 0.000 m
*VH SD NEZ NP/P
6 Collimate back sight point. Collimate V : 90°00'00"
Select one of the measuring mode and press the BS HR: 0°00'00"
soft key. [F2] SD*[n] <<< m
EXAMPLE : [F2](Slope Distance) key.
> Measuring...
Horizontal circle is set to calculated direction
angle. Measuring starts. DATA COLLECT 1/2
Measuring result is memorized and the display F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
returns to the data collect menu 1/2.
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS P↓

*1) Pressing each time the [F3] key, the input method changes as Coordinate value, Angle, Coordinate
point name alternatively.
*2) Refer to Chapter 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*3) PCODE can be input by inputting a register number linked with PCODE Library.
To show the list of PCODE library, press the [F2](SRCH) key.
*4) Data collect sequence can be set to [MEAS→ EDIT]. Refer to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data
Collect [CONFIG.]”.

z If point is not found in internal memory " PT# DOES NOT EXIST" is displayed.

7-6
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.2 Operational Procedure of DATA COLLECT

Operating procedure Operation Display

DATA COLLECT 1/2

F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS P↓
1 Press the [F3](FS/SS) key from the data collect [F3] PT# →
menu 1/2. PCODE :
The previous data is shown.
R.HT : 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
2 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#. [F1] PT# =PT-01
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PT# PCODE :
[F4] R.HT : 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]

PT# :PT-01
PCODE →
R.HT : 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
3 Enter PCODE, R.HT in the same way. *2),3) [F1] PT# → PT-01
Enter PCODE :TOPCON
PCODE R.HT : 1.200 m
[F4] INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
[F1] VH *SD NEZ P1↓
4 Press the [F3](MEAS) key. EnterR.HT
[F4]
5 Collimate the target point. [F3]

Collimate

6 Press one of the [F1] to [F3] key. *4) [F2] V : 90°10'20"

Example: [F2](SD) key. HR: 120°30'40"
Measuring starts.
SD*[n] < m
> Measuring...
The measuring data is memorized and the display < complete >
changes to the next point. *5)
PT# is automatically incremented. PT# → PT-02
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
7 Enter the next point data and collimate the next Collimate
point.
8 Press [F4](ALL) key. [F4] V : 90°10'20"
Measuring starts in the same measuring mode of HR: 120°30'40"
the previous point.
SD*[n] < m
Data is recorded.
> Measuring...
< complete >

PT# → PT-03
Continue the measuring in the same way. PCODE :TOPCON
To finish the mode , press [ESC] key.
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

7-7
 7 DATA COLLECTION

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) PCODE can be input by inputting a register number linked with PCODE Library.
To show the list of PCODE library, press the [F2](SRCH) key.
*3) Data collect sequence can be set to [MEAS→ EDIT]. See to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data
Collect [CONFIG.]”.
*4) The mark "*" indicates the previous measuring mode.
*5) You can confirm the measured data as follows. Refer to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data Collect
[CONFIG.]”.

V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
SD: 98.765 m
> OK ? [YES][NO]

7.2.1 Searching the recorded data

While executing the DATA COLLECT mode, you can search the recorded data.

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# → PT-02
PCODE :
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 While executing the DATA COLLECT mode, [F2] SEARCH [TOPCON]
press [F2](SRCH) key. *1) F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
The using file name will appear on the top of the
right side of the display.
F3:PT# DATA

2 Select one of three search methods by pressing [F1] to [F3]

[F1] to [F3] key. *2)

*1) It is possible to see the PCODE list when the arrow is located beside PCODE or ID.
*2) The operation is same as the "SEARCH" in the MEMORY MANAGER mode.
For more information, refer to Section 9.2 “Searching Data”.

7.2.2 Entering PCODE / ID using PCODE Library

While executing the DATA COLLECT mode, you can enter PCODE /ID from PCODE Library.

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# :PT-02
PCODE →
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Move the arrow to the PCODE or ID in the DATA [F1] PT# :PT-02
COLLECT mode, press the [F1](INPUT) key. PCODE =32
R.HT : 1.200 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
2 Enter a register number linked with PCODE library Enter No PT# :PT-02
and press the [F4](ENT) key. [F4] PCODE :TOPCON
(Example)
R.HT → 1.200 m
Register number, 32 = TOPCON
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

7-8
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.2.3 Entering PCODE / ID from the list of PCODE

You can also enter PCODE / ID from the list of PCODE.

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# :PT-02
PCODE →
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Move the arrow to the PCODE or ID in the DATA [F2]
COLLECT mode, press the [F2](SRCH) key. → 001:PCODE01
002:PCODE02
EDIT ––– CLR ENTER
2 By pressing the following keys, the register [ ] or [ ] 031:PCODE31
number will increase or decrease.
[ ] or [ ] → 032:TOPCON
[ ] or [ ]: Increasing or Decreasing one by one 033:HILTOP
[ ] or [ ]: By ten Increasing or Decreasing. *1) EDIT ––– CLR ENTER
3 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] PT# :PT-02
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT → 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

*1) To edit the PCODE library, press the [F1](EDIT) key.

To delete the PCODE registered with shown an arrow, press the [F3](CLR) key.
PCODE can be edited in DATA COLLECT menu 2/2 or MEMORY MANAGER menu 2/3.

7-9
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.3 Data Collect Offset Measurement mode

This mode is useful when it is difficult to set up the prism directly, for example at the center of a tree.
Data Collect . Offset Measurement has two measuring methods.
z Angle offset measurement
z Distance offset measurement
z Plane offset measurement
z Column offset measurement

7.3.1 Angle Offset Measurement

Place the prism at the same horizontal distance from the instrument as that of point A0 to measure.

When measuring coordinates of ground point A1 :Set the

instrument height / prism height.

When measuring coordinates of point A0 : Set the

instrument height only. (Set the prism height to 0 ).
Prism P

When sighting to A0, you can select one of two

Prism height ways. One is to fix vertical angle to the prism
position even up down the telescope position, and
the other is to gear vertical angle to the up down
of telescope movement. In case following the
vertical angle to the movement of telescope, SD
(Slope Distance) and VD (Vertical Distance) will
be changed according to the movement of
telescope.
To set this option, refer to Chapter 16
“SELECTING MODE”.

Instrument height

Occ.Point

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# →PT-11
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Press the [F3](MEAS) key and press the [F4]key [F3] PT# →PT-11
to get to the next soft key page. [F4] PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
VH *SD NEZ P1↓
OFSET PTL NP/P P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F1](ANG.OFFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
HD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
4 Collimate the prism. Collimate P

7-10
 7 DATA COLLECTION

5 Press the [F1](MEAS) key. [F1] OFFSET-MEASUREMENT

Continuous measuring starts. HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[n] < m
>measuring ...

OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
SD* 12.345 m
>OK? [YES][NO]
6 Collimate point A0 using the horizontal motion Collimate OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
clamp and horizontal tangent screw. A0 HR: 123°30'40"
SD: 12.345 m
>OK? [YES][NO]
7 Show the horizontal distance of point A0. OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
[ ]
HR: 123°30'40"
HD: 6.543 m
>OK? [YES][NO]
8 Show the relative elevation of point A0. OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
[ ]
HR: 123°30'40"
z Each time pressing [ ] key, horizontal distance ,
VD: 0.843 m
relative elevation and slope distance are shown in
sequence.
>OK? [YES][NO]

9 Show N coordinate of point A0 or A1. OFFSET-MEASUREMENT

[ ]
HR: 123°30'40"
z Each time pressing [ ] key, N,E and Z
N : –12.345 m
coordinate are shown in sequence.
>OK? [YES][NO]
10 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] PT# → PT-12
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
The data is recorded and the next measuring point
is displayed.
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

7-11
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.3.2 Distance Offset Measurement

The measurement of a place apart from a prism is possible by inputting offset horizontal distance of
front and back / right and left.
Forward HD

oHD sign
A0

A1 RorL HD

Prism height

Prism P

Instrument height

Occ.Point

When measuring coordinates of ground point A1: Set the instrument height / prism height.

When measuring coordinates of point A0: Set the instrument height only.
(Set the prism height to 0 ).

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# →PT-11
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Press the [F3](MEAS) key and press the [F4]key [F3] PT# →PT-11
to get to the next soft key page. [F4] PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
VH *SD NEZ P1↓
OFSET PTL NP/P P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F2](DIST.OFFSET) key. [F2] DISTANCE OFFSET
INPUT RorL HD
oHD=0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter Right and Left direction offset value.*1) Enter HD DISTANCE OFFSET
[F4] INPUT FORWARD HD
oHD=0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

7-12
 7 DATA COLLECTION

5 Enter Forward direction offset value. *1) Enter HD PT# :PT-11

[F4] PCODE : TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
––– *SD NEZ NP/P
6 Collimate the prism. Collimate P

7 Press the [F2] or [F3] key. [F3] N*[n] <<< m

Example:[F3](NEZ) key E : m
Measuring starts.
Z : m
>measuring ...
>Calculating...

The data is recorded and the next measuring point PT# → PT-12
is displayed. PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

*1) To skip entering, press the [F3](SKP) key.

7-13
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.3.3 Plane Offset Measurement

Measuring will be taken for the place where direct measuring can not be done, for example distance or
coordinate measuring for a edge of a plane.
Three random points (P1, P2, P3) on a plane will be measured at first in the plane offset measurement
to determine the measured plane. Collimate the measuring point (P0) then the instrument calculates
and displays coordinate and distance value of cross point between collimation axis and of the plane.

Edge
P

P3 P2

Target heights of P1 to P3 is set to zero automatically.

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# →PT-11
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Press the [F3](MEAS) key and press the [F4]key [F3] PT# →PT-11
to get to the next soft key page. [F4] PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.200 m
VH *SD NEZ P1↓
OFSET PTL NP/P P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F3](PLANE OFFSET) key. [F3] PLANE
N001#:
SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
4 Collimate prism P1, and press the [F1](MEAS) Collimate PLANE
key. P1 N001#:
Measuring will start. [F1] SD* [n] << m
After measuring, the display will show the second
point measurement.
>Measuring...

7-14
 7 DATA COLLECTION

5 Measure the second and third points in the same Collimate PLANE
way. *1) P2 N002#:
[F1] SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---

Collimate PLANE
P3 N003#:
[F1] SD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---

The display changes to PT# input in the plane PLANE

offset measurement.
PT# → PT-11
Input point number if necessary.
PCODE :TOPCON
INPUT SRCH --- MEAS
6 Press the [F4](MEAS) key. [F4] HR: 80°30'40"
The instrument calculates and displays coordinate HD: 54.321 m
and distance value of cross point between
VD: 10.000 m
collimation axis and of the plane. *2)
>OK? [YES][NO]
7 Collimate the edge (P0) of the plane. *3), 4) Collimate HR: 75°30'40"
P0 HD: 54.600 m
VD: -0.487 m
>OK? [YES][NO]
8 To show the slope distance (SD), press the [ ] V : 90°30'40"
key. HR: 75°30'40"
z Each time pressing the [ ] key, horizontal SD: 54.602 m
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
>OK? [YES][NO]
shown in sequence.
z To show coordinate value of point P0, press the
[ ] key.
9 Press the [F3](YES) key. Next offset point number [F3] PLANE
will be displayed. PT# → PT-12
PCODE :TOPCON
INPUT SRCH --- MEAS
10 To escape the measuring, press the [ESC] key. [ESC] PT# → PT-12
The display returns to the next point number in PCODE :TOPCON
data collect mode. R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

*1) In case the calculation of plane was not successful by the measured three points, error displays. Start
measuring over again from the first point.
*2) Data display is the mode beforehand of offset measurement mode.
*3) Error will be displayed when collimated to the direction which does not cross with the determined plane.
*4) The reflector height of the target point P0 is set to zero automatically

7-15
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.3.4 Column Offset Measurement

If it is possible to measure circumscription point (P1) of column directly, the distance to the center of the
column (P0), coordinate and direction angle can be calculated by measured circumscription points (P2)
and (P3).
The direction angle of the center of the column is 1/2 of total direction angle of circumscription points
(P2) and (P3).

P2 P

P P3

Example: Non-prism measurement

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# →PT-11
PCODE :TOPCON N
P
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Press the [F3](MEAS) key and press the [F4]key [F3] PT# →PT-11
to get to the next soft key page. [F4] PCODE :TOPCON N
P
R.HT : 1.200 m
VH *SD NEZ P1↓
OFSET PTL NP/P P2↓
2 Press the [F1](OFSET) key. [F1] OFFSET 1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET N
P
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the [F4](P1↓) key. [F4] OFFSET 2/2
F1:COLUMN OFFSET NP

P↓
4 Press the [F1](COLUMN OFFSET) key. [F1] COLUMN OFFSET
N
Center P
HD: m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
5 Collimate the center of the column (P1) and press Collimate COLUMN OFFSET
the [F1](MEAS) key. P1 Center N
P
Measuring will start. [F1] HD* [n] << m
After the measurement, angle measuring display
of the left side (P2) will be shown.
>Measuring...

7-16
 7 DATA COLLECTION

6 Collimate the left side of the column (P2) and Collimate COLUMN OFFSET
press the [F4](SET) key. P2 Left N
P
After the measurement, angle measuring display [F4] HR: 120°30'40"
of the right side (P3) will be shown.
--- --- --- SET

7 Collimate the right side of the column (P3) and Collimate COLUMN OFFSET
press the [F4](SET) key. P3 Right N
P
[F4] HR: 180°30'40"
--- --- --- SET

The distance between the instrument and center COLUMN OFFSET

of the column (P0) will be calculated.
HR: 150°30'40" NP
HD: 43.321 m
>OK? [YES][NO]
To show the relative elevation (VD), press the COLUMN OFFSET
[ ]
[ ] key. HR: 150°30'40" NP
Each time pressing the [ ] key, horizontal VD: 2.321 m
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are >OK? [YES][NO]
shown in sequence.
To show coordinate of point P0, press the [ ]
key.
8 Press the [F3](YES) key. The display returns to [F3] PT# → PT-12
the next point number in data collect mode. PCODE :TOPCON N
P
R.HT : 1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

7.4 NEZ Auto Calculation

As measured data is collected, coordinates are calculated and stored for traverse or topo collection.
Automatic making out function of coordinate data sets up in CONFIG of data collect. Refer to Section
7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data Collect [CONFIG.]”.
As a default, coordinate data calculated will be saved in a file of the same name as the measurement
data file.
When the coordinate data file of the same name as the measurement data file does not exist, it will be
generated automatically.
It is possible to change a file for saving coordinate data in the DATA COLLECT Menu 2/2 (F1:SELECT
A FILE).
To calculate a coordinate data, it is necessary to add a point number in Data Collect execution.
When a coordinate data of the same point number exist already, it can be replaced with the new data by
confirming display.

z Coordinates will be calculated using the grid factor.

To set the grid factor, see Section 6.2 “Setting the GRID FACTOR”.

7-17
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.5 Point to Line Measurement

In this mode, a offsetting point from a certain determined line can be measured.

N Line
Ref.P2

ΔO

Ref.P1

PT#
(PT#PTL)

ΔL

OCC.PT
Offset
E

7.5.1 To change to the point to line measurement

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT# →PT-01
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.500 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
1 Press the [F3](MEAS) key and press the [F4]key [F3] PT# →PT-01
to get to the next soft key page. [F4] PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.500 m
VH *SD NEZ P1↓
OFSET PTL NP/P P2↓
2 Press the [F2](PTL) key. [F2] POINT TO LINE MODE
[F1:ON ]
F2:OFF
ENTER
3 Press the [F1](ON) key and press the [F4] REF. POINT 1
[F4](ENTER) key. PT#:
The input screen of a reference point 1 will appear.
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
4 Enter the point 1 data and press the [F4](Enter). Input data REF. POINT 2
The input screen of a reference point 2 will [F4] PT#:
appear.
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
5 Enter the point 2 data and press the [F4](Enter). Input data PT#PTL→ PT-01
The screen will return to data collect [F4] PCODE :TOPCON
measurement. R.HT : 1.500 m
If the PTL measurement mode is available, ‘PTL’
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
will appear next to PT#.

7-18
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.5.2 Executing a point to line measurement

Operating procedure Operation Display

Conduct data measurement according to the same PT#PTL→PT-01

procedure as with ordinary FS/SS (ALL can also be PCODE :TOPCON
selected). However, when you conduct observation in R.HT : 1.500 m
the angle mode, PTL data will not be displayed (only INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
the raw data will be recorded, upon which the
operation will end).
1 Press the [F3](MEAS) key. [F3] PT#PTL→PT-01
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.500 m
VH *SD NEZ P1↓
2 Press the [F2](SD) key. [F2] V : 90°10'20"
If the PTL mode is on, then, after the coordinate HR: 120°30'40"
data is calculated, the PTL data will be displayed
SD* < m
regardless of the coordinate check setting, etc.
> Measuring...
3 PTL measurement data will display. [F3] L: 44.789 m
Confirm the data and press [F3](YES) key. O: 33.456 m
The recorded data are measured data and
E: 2.321 m
coordinate data generated at the same time as a
PTL data.
>REC? [YES][NO]

PT#PTL→ PT-02
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT : 1.500 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL

z In the PTL measurement mode, NEZ Auto Calculation will be turned on compulsorily and the
coordinate data will be stored into a coordinate file.

7-19
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.6 Editing PCODE Library [PCODE INPUT]

PCODE data can be entered into PCODE Library in this mode.
A PCODE is liked with a number of 1 to 50.
PCODE can be also edited in MEMORY MANAGER menu 2/3 in the same way.

Operating procedure Operation Display

DATA COLLECT 2/2

F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG. P↓
1 Press the [F2](PCODE INPUT) key from Data [F2]
Collect menu 2/2. → 001:TOPCON
002:TOKYO
EDIT ––– CLR –––
2 By pressing the following keys, the list will [ ] or [ ] 011:URAH
increase or decrease.
[ ] or [ ] → 012:AMIDAT
[ ] or [ ]: Increasing or Decreasing one by one 013:HILLTO
[ ] or [ ]: By ten Increasing or Decreasing. EDIT ––– CLR –––
3 Press the [F1](EDIT) key. [F1] 011:URAH
→ 012=AMIDAT
013:HILLTO
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
4 Enter PCODE and press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter 011:URAH
PCODE → 012:AMISUN
[F4] 013:HILLTO
EDIT ––– CLR –––

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

7-20
 7 DATA COLLECTION

7.7 Setting Parameter of Data Collect [CONFIG.]

In this mode, the following settings of data collect mode are possible.
z Setting Items

Menu Selecting Item Contents

Select Fine /Coarse(1) /Coarse(10) mode in distance

measurement mode.
FINE / CRS(1) / The unit to be displayed is as follows.
F1:DIST MODE
CRS(10) Fine mode: 1mm (0.2mm)
Coarse (1) mode: 1mm
Coarse (10) mode: 10mm

Select the distance measurement mode Horizontal

F2:HD/SD HD/SD
Distance or Slope distance.

N-TIMES / Select to set measurement mode for distance

F3:MEAS. SEQ. SINGLE / REPEAT measurement.

It is possible to confirm the result of measuring data

F1:DATA CONFIRM YES/NO
before the data is recorded.

Select the procedure of data collection.

[EDIT→MEAS] :Measurement is carried out after
[EDIT→MEAS] /
F2:COLLECT SEQ. entering other data.
[MEAS→EDIT]
[MEAS→EDIT] :Measurement is carried out before
entering other data.

It is possible to calculate coordinate value of data collected

F3:NEZ AUTO. CALC ON/OFF
and store it into coordinate data file in every data collection.

z How to Set Items

Example Setting: DATA CONFIRM : YES

Operating procedure Operation Display

DATA COLLECT 2/2

F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG. P↓
1 Press the [F3] (CONFIG.) key from the data collect [F3] CONFIG. 1/2
menu 2/2. F1:DIST MODE
The CONFIG menu 1/2 is shown.
F2:HD/SD
F3:MEAS. SEQ. P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key to display the CONFIG [F4] CONFIG. 2/2
menu 2/2. F1:DATA CONFIRM
F2:COLLECT SEQ.
F3:NEZ AUTO.CALC P↓
3 Press the [F1] (DATA CONFIRM) key. [F1] DATA CONFIRM
[ ] indicates the current setting. F1:YES
[F2:NO ]
ENTER
4 Press the [F1] (YES) key. [F1] DATA CONFIRM
[F1:YES]
F2:NO
ENTER
5 Press the [F4] (ENTER) key. [F4]

7-21
 8 LAYOUT

8 LAYOUT
LAYOUT mode has two functions which are setting of layout points and setting new points using
coordinate data in the internal memory.
Also, if the coordinate data is not stored in the internal memory, this can be input from keyboard.
The coordinate data is loaded from PC to the internal memory via RS-232C.
z The coordinate data
The coordinate data is memorized into a file.
For the internal memory, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.

The GPT-3200N/NW is able to store the coordinate data into the internal memory.
The internal memory is shared by the measured data and the coordinate data for layout.
Maximum 30 files can be generated.
z The number of coordinate data
(In case not using the internal memory in the data collect mode)

MAX. 24,000 points

Because the internal memory covers both data collection mode and layout mode, the number of
coordinate data will be decreased when the data collection mode is used.

1) When turning off the power, ensure that you are in the main menu screen or main angle
measurement mode.
This ensures completion of the memory access process and avoids possible damage to the
stored data.
2) It is recommended for safety to charge the battery (BT-52QA) beforehand and prepare fully
charged spare batteries.
3) When recording new point data, remember to consider the amount of internal memory
available.

8-1
 8 LAYOUT

z Layout menu operation

By pressing the [MENU] key, the instrument will be in MENU 1/3 mode.
Press the [F3](LAYOUT) key, the menu of layout 1/2 will be shown.

Normal measurement mode

[ESC] [MENU]
MENU 1/3
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
[F3]
SELECT A FILE Selecting a file for LAYOUT
FN:_________ [F1](INPUT) : Input a new file name.
[F2](LIST) : Seek for a file.
[F3](SKP) : If you do not want to create or reselect a file.
INPUT LIST SKP ENTER [F4](ENTER) : To select display file.

[F3]/[F4] OCC.PT INPUT

LAYOUT 1/2 OCC.PT
F1:OCC.PT INPUT [ESC] [F1] PT#:__________
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT P↓ INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
LAYOUT MENU 1/2 BACKSIGHT
BACKSIGHT
[F2] PT#:__________

INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT

DATA INPUT
[F4]
LAYOUT
[F3] PT#:__________

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

SELECT A FILE
LAYOUT 2/2 SELECT A FILE
F1:SELECT A FILE [ESC] [F1] FN:__________
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓ INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
LAYOUT MENU 2/2 NEW POINT
NEW POINT
[F2] F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION

GRID FACTOR
GRID FACTOR
[F3] =1.000000

>MODIFY? [YES][NO]

8-2
 8 LAYOUT

8.1 Preparation
8.1.1 Setting the GRID FACTOR
z Calculation Formula
1) Elevation Factor
R R : The average radius of the earth
Elevation Factor =
R+ELEV. ELEV. : The elevation above mean sea level
2) Scale Factor
Scale Factor : Scale Factor at the surveying station
3) Grid Factor
Grid Factor = Elevation Factor × Scale Factor

Distance Calculation
1) Grid Distance
HDg : Grid distance
HDg = HD × Grid Factor HD : Ground distance
2) Ground Distance
HDg
HD =
Grid Factor

z How to Set Grid Factor

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT 2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
1 Press the [F3](GRID FACTOR) key from the [F3] GRID FACTOR
Layout menu 2/2. =0.998843

>MODIFY? [YES][NO]
2 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] GRID FACTOR
ELEV.=1000 m
SCALE:0.999000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Enter Elevation. *1) Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter ELEV.
[F4]

4 Enter Scale Factor in the same way. Enter Scale GRID FACTOR
[F4] ELEV.:2000 m
SCALE=1.001000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

Grid Factor is displayed for 1 to 2 second and GRID FACTOR

display returns to Layout menu 2/2. =1.000686

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input Range :Elevation : –9,999 to +9,999 meter (–32,805 to +3,2805 ft, ft+in)
Scale Factor : 0.990000 to 1.010000
z See section 8.1.1 “Setting the GRID FACTOR” for more information.

8-3
 8 LAYOUT

8.1.2 Selecting Coordinate Data File

You can execute a Layout from selected coordinate data file, also you can record New point measured
data into the selected coordinate data file.
z The only coordinate data file existing can be selected and you can not make a new file in this mode.
For more information about File, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.
z When LAYOUT MODE is begun, a file can be selected in the same way.

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT 2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
1 Press the [F1](SELECT A FILE) key from the [F1] SELECT A FILE
Layout menu 2/2. FN:

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

2 Press the [F2](LIST) key to display the list of [F2] COORDDATA /C0123
coordinate data file.*1) →*TOKBDATA /C0345
TOPCDATA /C0789
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
3 Scroll file list by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key and [ ] or [ ] *TOKBDATA /C0345
select a file to use. *2),3) → TOPCDATA /C0789
SATIDATA /C0456
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
4 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] LAYOUT 2/2
The file will be set . F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓

*1) If you want to input file name directly, press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter a file name.
*2) When a file has been selected already, ‘*’ mark is indicated on left of current file name.
For the file discrimination mark (*, @, &), refer to Section 9.3 “File Maintenance”.
*3) Data in a file shown with arrow can be searched by pressing the [F2](SRCH) key.

8-4
 8 LAYOUT

8.1.3 Setting Occupied Point

Occupied point can be set by two setting methods as follow.
1) Setting from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
2) Direct key input of coordinate data.

z Example setting :Setting the occupied point from the internal coordinate data file

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F1](OCC.PT INPUT) key from the [F1] OCC.PT
Layout menu 1/2. PT#:

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

2 Press the [F1] (INPUT) key and enter PT#. *1) [F1] OCC.PT
Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter PT# PT#=PT-01
[F4]
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
3 Enter INS.HT in the same way. Enter INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INS.HT INPUT
INS.HT= 0.000 m
[F4] --- --- [CLR] [ENT]
The display returns to layout menu 1/2. LAYOUT 1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT P↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

8-5
 8 LAYOUT

z Example setting :Setting Instrument point coordinates directly

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F1](OCC.PT INPUT) key from the [F1] OCC.PT
Layout menu 1/2. PT#:

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

2 Press the [F3] (NEZ) key. [F3] N→ 0.000 m
E: 0.000 m
Z: 0.000 m
INPUT --- PT# ENTER
3 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter [F1] COORD.DATA INPUT
coordinate value. Enter coord. PT#:
press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4]
INPUT ––– ––– ENTER
4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#. [F1] INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *2) Enter PT# INPUT
[F4] INS.HT= 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Enter Instrument Height in the same way. Enter LAYOUT 1/2
INS.HT F1:OCC.PT INPUT
[F4] F2:BACKSIGHT
The display returns to layout menu 1/2.
F3:LAYOUT P↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) It is possible to record the coordinate value. Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

8-6
 8 LAYOUT

8.1.4 Setting Backsight Point

The following three setting methods for Backsight point can be selected.
1) Setting from the coordinate data file stored in the internal memory.
2) Direct key input of coordinate data.
3) Direct key input of setting angle.

z Example setting :Setting the backsight point from the internal coordinate data file

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F2](BACKSIGHT) key from the Layout [F2] BACKSIGHT
menu 1/2. PT#:

INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT

2 Press the [F1] (INPUT) key. [F1] BACKSIGHT
Enter PT#, press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PT# PT#=BK-01
[F4]
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]

BACKSIGHT
H(B)= 0°00'00"

>Sight ? [YES][NO]
3 Sight the backsight point and press the [F3](YES) Sight BK
key. [F3]
The display returns to the layout menu 1/2.

*1) Refer to Section 2.6 "How to enter alphanumeric characters".

z With each pressing of [F3] key,

method of inputting backsight BACKSIGHT
is changed. PT#:

INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT

[F3](NE/AZ)

N → m
E : m

INPUT ––– AZ ENTER

[F3](AZ)
BACKSIGHT
HR:

INPUT ––– PT# ENTER

[F3](PT#)

8-7
 8 LAYOUT

z Example setting: Setting the backsight point coordinates directly

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F2](BACKSIGHT) key from the Layout [F2] BACKSIGHT
menu 1/2. PT#:
The previous data is shown.
INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT
2 Press the [F3] (NE/AZ) key. [F3] N→ m
E: m

INPUT ––– AZ ENTER

3 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter coordinate [F1] BACKSIGHT
value. Enter coord. H(B)= 0°00'00"
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) , 2) [F4]
>Sight ? [YES][NO]
4 Sight the backsight point. Sight BK

5 Press the [F3](YES) key. [F3] LAYOUT 1/2

F1:OCC.PT INPUT
The display returns to the layout menu 1/2.
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT P↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) It is possible to record the coordinate value. Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

8-8
 8 LAYOUT

8.2 Executing a Layout

The following methods can be selected for executing a Layout:
1) Recalling points from internal memory by point number.
2) Direct key input of coordinate values.
Example setting : Recalling point from internal memory.

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT 1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
1 Press the [F3](LAYOUT) key from the layout menu [F3] LAYOUT
1/2. PT#:

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

2 Press the [F1](INPUT) key, and enter PT#. *1) [F1] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *2) Enter PT# INPUT
[F4] R.HT = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Enter reflector height in the same way. Enter R.HT CALCULATED
[F4] HR= 90°10'20"
When the layout point is set, the instrument will
HD= 123.456 m
start layout calculation.
HR: Calculated horizontal angle of the layout point
ANGLE DIST ––– –––
HD: Calculated horizontal distance from the
instrument to the layout point
4 Collimate the prism, and press the [F1](ANGLE) Collimate P PT#: LP-100
key. [F1] HR: 6°20'40"
PT#: Layout point
dHR: 23°40'20"
HR: Measured (Actual) horizontal angle.
dHR: Horizontal angle to be turned to the layout
DIST ––– NEZ –––
point = Actual horizontal angle - Calculated
horizontal angle.
Correct direction when dHR = 0°00'00"
5 Press the [F1](DIST) key. [F1] HD*[t] < m
HD: Measuring (Actual) horizontal distance dHD: m
dHD: Horizontal distance to be turned to the
dZ: m
layout point = Actual horizontal distance –
Calculated horizontal distance.
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT
dZ: Vertical distance to be turned to the layout
point = Actual vertical distance – Calculated HD* 110.12 m
vertical distance. dHD: –13.34 m
dZ: –0.05 m
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT
6 Press the [F1](MODE) key. [F1] HD*[r] < m
The fine mode measuring starts. dHD: m
dZ: m
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT

HD* 120.129 m
dHD: –3.327 m
dZ: –0.046 m
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT

8-9
 8 LAYOUT

7 When the display value dHR, dHD and dZ are

equal to 0, the layout point is established.*3 )
8 Press the [F2](NEZ) key. [F2] N * 100.000 m
The coordinate data is shown. E : 100.000 m
Z : 1.015 m
MODE ANGLE NP/P NEXT
9 Press the [F4](NEXT) key to set next layout point . [F4] LAYOUT
PT# is automatically incremented. PT#: LP-101

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) Point number could not be entered when data to comply with the coordinate value does not exist in the
file.
*3) Cut & Fill displaying function is available . Refer to Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

z Point Guide Function

The point guide function can be used while executing a Layout.

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT#:P1003
HR: 6°20'40"
dHR: 23°40'20"
DIST --- NEZ ---
1 After measuring Angle, Distance or Coordinate, [MENU] POINTGUIDE [OFF]
press the [MENU] key.

––– ––– [ON][OFF]

2 Press the [F3](ON) or [MENU] key. [F3] POINTGUIDE [ON]
or
[MENU]
––– ––– [ON][OFF]
3 Press the [ESC] key to return to the previous [ESC] PT#:P1003
display. HR: 6°20'40"
dHR: 23°40'20"
DIST --- NEZ ---

8-10
 8 LAYOUT

8.2.1 Layout of Coordinates of Point to Line

The coordinate data of point to line can be used during execution of layout.
When a point name including PTL coordinates (including ‘From’ and ‘To’ data) is specified, the mode
will change to PTL mode automatically.
There are two ways to enter the PTL coordinate data, Direct key input and Data transfer.
Refer to 9.4.2 “PTL (Point to Line) data input” and 9.7 “Data Communications”.
N
Line
To

Collimation point
From ΔO

Layout point

ΔL
OCC.PT

Offset E

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT
PT#: PT-21

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

1 Press the [F1](INPUT) key, and enter PT#. [F1] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter PT# INPUT
[F4] R.HT = 1.500 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
2 Enter reflector height in the same way. Enter R.HT CALCULATED
[F4] HR= 45°10'20"
When the layout point is set, the instrument will
HD= 1.500 m
start layout calculation.
The [F3](PTL) key will be assigned.
ANGLE DIST PTL –––

3 Collimate the prism, and press the [F1](ANGLE) Collimate P PT#: LP-100
key. [F1] HR: 45°00'00"
dHR: 0°00'00"
DIST ––– PTL –––
4 Press the [F1](DIST) key. [F1] HD* 143.84 m
HD: Measuring (Actual) horizontal distance dHD: –13.34 m
dHD: Horizontal distance to be turned to the
dZ: –0.05 m
layout point = Actual horizontal distance –
Calculated horizontal distance.
MODE PTL NP/P NEXT
dZ: Vertical distance to be turned to the layout
point = Actual vertical distance – Calculated
vertical distance.
5 Press the [F2](PTL) key. [F2] dL: 0.005 m
The difference between Collimation point and dO: 0.327 m
Layout point distance on the coordinate system of
dE: 0.046 m
the line determined will be displayed.
MODE ANGLE NP/P NEXT

8-11
 8 LAYOUT

8.3 Setting a New Point

New point is required for example when a layout point cannot be sighted from existing control points.

8.3.1 Side Shot Method

Set up the instrument at a known point, and measure the coordinate of the new points by the side shot
method

N
Known Point B

New Point

Known Point A
(Instrument)

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT 1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
1 Press the [F4](↓) key from the layout menu 1/2 to [F4] LAYOUT 2/2
get the layout menu 2/2. F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2](NEW POINT). [F2] NEW POINT
F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION

3 Press the [F1](SIDE SHOT) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE

FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––––ENTER

4 Press the [F2](LIST) key to display the list of [F2] COORDDATA /C0123
coordinate data file. *1) →*TOKBDATA /C0345
TOPCDATA /C0789
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
5 Scroll file list by pressing [ ] or [ ] key and [ ] or [ ] *TOKBDATA /C0345
select a file to use. *2),3) → TOPCDATA /C0789
SATIDATA /C0456
––– SRCH ––– ENTER

8-12
 8 LAYOUT

6 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] SIDE SHOT

The file will be set . PT#:

INPUT SRCH ––– ENTER

7 Press the [F1](INPUT) key, and enter the new [F1] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
point name. *4) Enter PT# INPUT
Press the [F4](ENT) key. [F4] R.HT = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
8 Enter reflector height in the same way. Enter R.HT REFLECTOR HEIGHT
[F4] INPUT
R.HT : 1.235 m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
9 Collimate the new point, and press the [F1] Collimate HR: 123°40'20"
(MEAS) key. [F1] HD*[n] < m
Distance measuring starts.
VD: m
> Measuring...
< complete >

N : 1234.567 m
E : 123.456 m
Z : 1.234 m
>REC ? [YES][NO]
10 Press the [F3](YES) key.*5) [F3] SIDE SHOT
The name and coordinate value are stored into PT#:NP-101
COORD.DATA.
The input menu for next new point is displayed.
PT# is automatically incremented.
INPUT SRCH ––– ENTER

*1) If you want to input file name directly, press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter a file name.
*2) When a file has been selected already, ‘*’ mark is indicated on left of current file name.
For the file discrimination mark (*, @, &), refer to Chapter 9.3 “File Maintenance”.
*3) Data in a file shown with arrow can be searched by pressing [F2](SRCH) key.
*4) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*5) An error will be displayed when the internal memory is full.

8-13
 8 LAYOUT

8.3.2 Resection Method

Set up the instrument at a new point, and calculate the coordinate of the new point using the coordinate
data of maximum seven known points and the measurements made to these points.
By following observation, resection is possible.
• Resection by distance measurement: 2 or more points must be measured
• Resection by angle measurement only: 3 or more points must be measured
An occupied point coordinate value will be calculated by the method of least squares.
(In case that 3 known points are measured by angle measurement only, the value would not be
calculated by the method of least squares. )

Known Point A

New Point
(Instrument)

Known Point B Max. 7 points

Known Point C

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT 1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT P↓
1 Press the [F4](↓) key from the layout menu 1/2 to [F4] LAYOUT 2/2
get the layout menu 2/2. F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the [F2](NEW POINT). [F2] NEW POINT
F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION

3 Press the [F2](RESECTION) key. [F2] NEW POINT

PT#:

INPUT SRCH SKP ENTER

4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key, and enter the new [F1]
point name. *1) ,2) Enter PT#
Press the [F4](ENT) key. [F4]

INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

8-14
 8 LAYOUT

5 Enter instrument height in the same way. Enter NO01#

INS.HT PT#:
[F4]
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
6 Enter the known point A number. *3) [F1] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
Enter PT# INPUT
[F4] R.HT = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
7 Enter reflector height. Enter R.HT REFLECTOR HEIGHT
[F4] INPUT
R.HT : 1.235 m
ANG DIST NP/P ---
8 Collimate the known point A, and press the Collimate A HR: 123°40'20"
[F1](ANG) or [F2](DIST) key. [F2] HD*[n] < m
Example:[F2](DIST)
VD: m
Distance measuring starts.
> Measuring...
< complete >

Known point B entering display will be shown. NO02#

PT#:

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

9 Same as procedure 6 to 8 proceed to the known
point B. SELECT GRID FACTOR
F1:USE LAST DATA
When two points have been measured by the F2:CALC MEAS.DATA
[F2](DIST) key, the RESIDUAL ERROR will be
calculated. *4)
10 Select GRID FACTOR for calculation of [F1] RESIDUAL ERROR
RESIDUAL ERROR by pressing [F1] or [F2] dHD= 0.015 m
key. *5)
dZ = 0.005 m
Example: [F1]
NEXT ––– G.F. CALC

11 Press the [F1](NEXT) key to measure other points. [F1] NO03#

Maximum seven points can be measured. PT#:

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

12 Same as procedure 6 to 8 proceed to the known HR: 123°40'20"

point C. HD*[n] < m
VD: m
> Measuring...
< complete >

HR: 123°40'20"
HD: 123.456 m
VD: 1.234 m
NEXT ––– ––– CALC

8-15
 8 LAYOUT

13 Press the [F4](CALC) key. *6) [F4] Standard Deviation

Standard Deviation will be shown. = 1.23 sec.
Unit : (sec.) or (mGON) or (mMIL)
––– ↓ ––– NEZ
14 Press the [F2](↓) key. [F2] SD(n) : 1.23 mm
Standard Deviations of each coordinate will be SD(e) : 1.23 mm
shown.
SD(z) : 1.23 mm
Unit : (mm) or (inch)
––– ↑ ––– NEZ
The display will be changed alternately by
pressing [F2](↓) or (↑) key.
15 Press the [F4](NEZ) key. [F4] N : 65.432 m
Coordinate data of the new point will be shown. E : 876.543 m
Z : 1.234 m
>REC ? [YES][NO]
16 Press the [F3](YES) key. *7) [F3] NEW POINT
The new point data will be stored into the F1:SIDE SHOT
coordinate data file and the value of occupied
F2:RESECTION
coordinate data will change to that of the
calculated NEW POINT.

The display returns to new point menu.

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) When there is no need to memorize the new point data, press the [F3](SKP) key.
*3) To enter the known point coordinate data by direct key inputting, press the [F3](NEZ) key.
*4) RESIDUAL ERROR;
dHD (Horizontal distance between two known points) =Measured value – Calculated value
dZ=(Z coordinate of the new point calculated from known point A) – (Z coordinate of the new point
calculated from known point B)
*5) [F1:USE LAST DATA]; RESIDUAL ERROR is calculated with GRID FACTOR already set.
[F2:CALC MEAS.DATA]; RESIDUAL ERROR is calculated without GRID FACTOR already set. In this
case, new GRID FACTOR is calculated from measured data and reset.
• To see the GRID FACTOR value, press the [F3](G.F.) key.
*6) In case that the all points are measured by angle measurement only, the following display will be shown.
You can select Z coordinate calculation.

CALC. Z COORD.
F1:YES
F2:NO

F1(YES) : :N,E,Z coordinates will be calculated with measured angle data.

F2(NO) : :N and E coordinates will be calculated with measured horizontal angle data. Z coordinate
would not be calculated.
(Z coordinate value =0.000m)

When the distance measurement is done even one point, Z coordinate will be calculated as a mean
value of relative distance (vertical distance data).

*7) The display shows ">SET ?" when [F3](SKP) key pressed in step 4. In this case, the new point data is
not stored into the coordinate data file, only the value of occupied coordinate data changes to that of the
calculated NEW POINT.

8-16
 8 LAYOUT

z Viewing PT# LIST

You can see the PT# List and enter the data from the List, also you can see coordinate data of a point.
[Example: Executing Layout Mode]

Operating procedure Operation Display

LAYOUT
PT#:

INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER

1 While executing the LAYOUT mode, press the [F2] [TOPCON ]
[F2](LIST) key. → DATA-01
The arrow(→) indicates selected data. DATA-02
VIEW SRCH ––– ENTER
2 By pressing the following keys, the list will [ ] or [ ] DATA-49
increase or decrease.
[ ] or [ ] → DATA-50
[ ] or [ ]: Increasing or Decreasing one by one. DATA-51
[ ] or [ ]: By ten Increasing or Decreasing. VIEW SRCH ––– ENTER
3 To show the coordinate of the selected data, press [F1] PT#⎦DATA-50
the [F1](VIEW) key. N⎦ 100.234 m
E⎦ 12.345 m
It is still possible to scroll the PT# data by pressing
Z⎦ 1.678 m
[ ] or [ ] key.
4 Press the [ESC] key. [ESC] DATA-49
The display returns to the List. → DATA-50
DATA-51
VIEW SRCH ––– ENTER
5 Press the [F4] (ENTER) key. [F4] REFLECTOR HEIGHT
The selected point number is set as PT#. INPUT
R.HT = 0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

z The operation of [F2](SRCH) is same as the "SEARCH" in the MEMORY MANAGER MODE.
For more information, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.

8-17
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

The following items for internal memory are available in this mode.
1) FILE STATUS : Checking the number of stored data / Remaining internal memory
capacity.
2) SEARCH : Searching the recorded data.
3) FILE MAINTAN. : Deleting files / Editing file name
4) COORD. INPUT : Inputting coordinate data into Coord. data file.
5) DELETE COORD. : Deleting coordinate data from Coord. data file.
6) PCODE INPUT : Inputting PCODE DATA into PCODE Library
7) DATA TRANSFER : Sending measured data or coordinate data or PCODE Library data /
Uploading coordinate data or PCODE Library data / Setting
communication parameters
8) INITIALIZE : Initializing internal memory.

z Memory manager menu operation

By pressing the [MENU] key, the instrument will be in MENU 2/3 mode.
Press the [F1](MEMORY MGR. ) key, the menu of MEMORY MGR. 1/3 will be shown.

Normal measurement mode

[MENU]
[ESC] [F4]

MENU 2/3
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓

[ESC] [F1]

MEMORY MGR. 1/3 MEMORY MGR. MENU 1/3

F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN.P↓

[F4]

MEMORY MGR. 2/3 MEMORY MGR. MENU 2/3

F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD
F3:PCODE INPUT P↓

[F4]

MEMORY MGR. 3/3 MEMORY MGR. MENU 3/3

F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
[F4]

9-1
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.1 Display Internal Memory Status

This mode is used to check the internal memory status.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR. ) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F1](FILE STATUS) key. [F1] FILE STATUS 1/2
MEAS. FILE : 3
The total number of stored measured data files
COORD. FILE: 6
and coordinate l files are shown.
[...........] P↓

Remaining memory capacity

3 Press the [F4](P↓) key. [F4] DATA STATUS 2/2
The total number of stored measured data and MEAS. DATA :0100
coordinate data in all files are shown.*1)
COORD. DATA:0050
[...........] P↓

*1) Each coordinate file has one extra data for working area.
z The FILE/DATA STATUS display will change alternately by pressing [F4](P↓) key.
z To return to MEMORY MGR. menu press the [ESC] key.

9-2
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.2 Searching Data

This mode is used to search the recorded file data in the DATA COLLECT or LAYOUT mode.
The following 3 search methods in each type of files can be selected.
1: First data search
2: Last data search
3: Point number search(MEAS.DATA, COORD.DATA)
Number search (PCODE LIB.)
MEAS. DATA : Measured data in the data collect mode.
COORD. DATA : Coordinate data for layout, control points and new point data measured in the
layout mode.
PCODE LIB. : The data which was registered with a number from 1 to 50 in Point code library.
Point name (PT#, BS#) , ID, PCODE and Height data (INS.HT, R.HT) can be corrected in the searching
mode.
Measured value can not be corrected.

9.2.1 Measured Data Searching

Example :Point number searching

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F2](SEARCH) key. [F2] SEARCH
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE LIB.
3 Press the [F1](MEAS. DATA) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE
FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter File Name. [F1] MEAS. DATA SEARCH
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1),2) Enter FN F1:FIRST DATA
[F4] F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
5 Press the [F3](PT# DATA) key. [F3] PT# DATA SEARCH
PT#=_________

[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
6 Enter PT#. Enter PT# PT#⎦TOP-104 1/2
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] V ⎦ 98°36'20"
HR⎦ 160°40'20"
TILT⎦ 0°00'00" ↓

7 Press the [F4](↓) key to scroll data for selected [F4] PT#⎦TOP-104 2/2
point. PCODE⎦
R.HT⎦ 1.200 m
EDIT ↓

*1) Refer to Section 2.6 "How to enter alphanumeric characters".

*2) To show the file list, press the [F2](LIST) key.
z "⎦ " represents data shown on the display is the stored data.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll to next or previous point.
z To search MEAS. DATA of the same point number, press [ ] or [ ] key.

9-3
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

z To edit the data in searching mode

Point name (PT#, BS#) , ID, PCODE and Height data (INS.HT, R.HT) can be corrected in the searching
mode.
Measured value can not be corrected.

Operating procedure Operation Display

PT#⎦TOP-104 2/2
PCODE⎦
R.HT⎦ 1.000 m
EDIT ↓

1 Press the [F1](EDIT) key from last page of [F1] PT# →TOP-104
displayed data. PCODE :
R.HT : 1.000 m
INPUT ––– ––– ENTER
2 Select the item to correct by pressing [ ] or [ ] [ ] or [ ] PT# :TOP-104
key. PCODE :
R.HT → 1.000 m
INPUT ––– ––– ENTER
3 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter data. *1) [F1] PT# →TOP-104
Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter Data PCODE :
[F4] R.HT : 1.200 m
4 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] >SAVE? [YES][NO]
5 Press the [F3](YES) key . [F3] PT#⎦TOP-104 2/2
PCODE⎦
R.HT⎦ 1.200 m
EDIT

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z When editing, ID and PCODE are not linked with PCODE LIBRARY.
z Even though the height data (INS.HT, R.HT) are corrected, the measured value can not be corrected.

9-4
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.2.2 Coordinate Data Searching

Example searching :Point number searching

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F2](SEARCH) key. [F2] SEARCH
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE LIB.
3 Press the [F2](COORD. DATA) key. [F2] SELECT A FILE
FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter File Name. [F1] COORD. DATA SEARCH
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter FN F1:FIRST DATA
[F4] F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
5 Press the [F3](PT# DATA) key. [F3] PT# DATA SEARCH
PT#=_________

[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
6 Enter PT#. Enter PT# PT#⎦TOP-104 1/2
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] N ⎦ 100.234 m
E ⎦ 12.345 m
Z ⎦ 1.678 m ↓

7 Press the [F4](↓ ) key to get the next page. [F4] PCODE ⎦ TOPS 2/2
STR. ⎦

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z "⎦ " represents data shown on the display is the stored data.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll to next or previous point.
z To search COORD. DATA of the same point number, press the [ ] or [ ] key.
z PTL data will be shown below.

PT#⎦TOP-105 1/2
L ⎦ 10.000 m
O ⎦ 20.000 m
E ⎦ 0.000 m ↓

[F4]
PCODE ⎦ TOPS 2/2
STR. ⎦
FROM ⎦ TOP-101
TO ⎦ TOP-102 ↓

9-5
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.2.3 PCODE LIBRARY Searching

Example searching :Number searching

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F2](SEARCH) key. [F2] SEARCH
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE LIB.
3 Press the [F3](PCODE LIB.) key. [F3] PCODE DATA SEARCH
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:No. SEARCH
4 Press the [F3](No. SEARCH) key. [F3] PCODE No. SEARCH
No.=

--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

5 Enter number.Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PT# 011:NAKADAI
[F4] →012:HILLTOP
The number and linked data will be shown. *2)
013:ITABASH
EDIT ––– CLR –––

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Press the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll to next or PCODE data.
*2) To correct the PCODE data , press the [F1](EDIT) key.
To delete the PCODE data, press the [F3](CLR) key.

9-6
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.3 File Maintenance

In this mode, the following items are available.
Renaming file name / Searching data in a file / Deleting files
z FILE MAINTAN. menu

MEMORY MGR. 1/3

F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN. P↓
[F3] [ESC]

@AMIDAT /C0123
→ ∗MEASD1 /M0123
&COORD1 /C0056
REN SRCH DEL –––

Deleting file
Searching data in a file

Renaming file name

Pressing [F3](FILE MAINTAN.) key from MEMORY MANAGER menu 1/3, file list will be shown.

• File discrimination mark (*,@,&)

File discrimination mark (*,@,&) placed before file name indicates the file status.
For measured data file
“ * ” selected file for DATA COLLECT mode.
For coordinate data file
“ * ” selected file for LAYOUT mode.
“ @ ” selected coordinate file for DATA COLLECT mode.
“ & ” selected coordinate file for both LAYOUT and DATA COLLECT mode.
• Data discrimination character (M, C)
Data discrimination character (M, C) placed before four figures indicates the type of data.
“ M ” : Measured data
“ C ” : Coordinate data.
• Four figures means the total number of data in the file.
(Coordinate data file has an extra data for working.)
Press the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll to next file.

9-7
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.3.1 Rename a File

An existing file in internal memory can be renamed.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](FILE MAINTAN.) key from the [F3]
Memory manager menu 1/3. →MEASD1 /M0123
COORD1 /C0056
REN SRCH DEL –––
2 Select a file by pressing [ ] or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] MEASD1 /M0123
→COORD1 /C0056
COORD2 /C0098
REN SRCH DEL –––
3 Press the [F1](REN) key. [F1] MEASD1 /M0123
=COORD1 /C0056
COORD1 /C0098
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
4 Enter new file name. Enter FN MEASD1 /M0123
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] →COORD5 /C0056
COORD1 /C0098
REN SRCH DEL –––

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

Existing file name can not be available.
To return to the FILE MAINTAN. Menu , press the [ESC] key.

9.3.2 Searching Data in a File

An existing file in internal memory can be searched.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](FILE MAINTAN.) key from the [F3]
Memory manager menu 1/3. →MEASD1 /M0123
COORD1 /C0056
REN SRCH DEL –––
2 Select a file to search by pressing [ ] or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] MEASD1 /M0123
→COORD1 /C0056
COORD2 /C0098
REN SRCH DEL –––
3 Press the [F2](SRCH) key. [F2] SEARCH [COORD1 ]
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
4 Select searching method by pressing the [F1] to [F1] to [F3]
[F3] key. *1)

*1) Because procedures from next are same as procedures of Section 9.2 "Searching Data", refer to
Section 9.2 “Searching Data”
To return to the FILE MAINTAN. Menu , press the [ESC] key.

9-8
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.3.3 Deleting a File

This mode erases a file from internal memory. Only one file can be erased at a time.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](FILE MAINTAN.) key from the [F3]
Memory manager menu 1/3. →MEASD1 /M0123
COORD1 /C0056
REN SRCH DEL –––
2 Select a file to delete by pressing [ ] or [ ] key. [ ] or [ ] MEASD1 /M0123
→COORD1 /C0056
COORD2 /C0098
REN SRCH DEL –––
3 Press the [F3](DEL) key. [F3] MEASD1 /M0123
→COORD1 /C0056
COORD2 /C0098
>DELETE? [NO][YES]
4 Confirm the deleting, and press the [F4](YES) key. [F4] MEASD1 /M0123
→COORD2 /C0098
COORD3 /C0321
REN SRCH DEL –––

z To return to the FILE MAINTAN. Menu , press the [ESC] key.

9-9
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.4 Coordinate Data Direct Key Input

9.4.1 Coordinate data input
Coordinate data for the layout point or control point can be input directly from the keyboard. This data
can be stored into a file in the internal memory.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT P↓
3 Press the [F1](COORD. INPUT) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE
FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter File Name [F1] COORD. DATA INPUT
you want to input. Enter FN F1:NEZ
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] F2:PTL

5 Select the kind of coordinates. [F1] COORD. DATA INPUT

NEZ: Coordinate data PT#:_________
PTL: The coordinate data for point to line
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
6 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#. [F1] N= 100.234 m
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PT# E: 12.345 m
[F4] Z: 1.678 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
7 Enter data. Enter data COORD. DATA INPUT
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] PCODE:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

8 Enter PCODE and press the [F4](ENTER). [F1] COORD. DATA INPUT
Enter PCODE PT#:TOPCON-102
Next input display is shown, point number (PT#) is [F4]
automatically incremented.
INPUT ––– ––– ENTER

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

9-10
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.4.2 PTL (Point to Line) data input

PTL Coordinate data for the layout point or control point can be input directly from the keyboard. This
data can be stored into a file in the internal memory.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT P↓
3 Press the [F1](COORD. INPUT) key. [F1] SELECT A FILE
FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter File Name [F1] COORD. DATA INPUT
you want to input. Enter FN F1:NEZ
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] F2:PTL

5 Select the kind of coordinates. [F2] COORD. DATA INPUT

NEZ: Coordinate data PT#:_________
PTL: The coordinate data for point to line
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
6 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#. [F1] L= m
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PT# O: m
[F4] E: m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
7 Enter data. Enter data PCODE→_________
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) [F4] FROM:
L: Line
TO :
O: Offset
E: Elevation
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
Enter PCODE , FROM and TO data and press the [F1] COORD. DATA INPUT
[F4](ENTER).*2) Enter PCODE PT#:TOPCON-102
[F4]
Next input display is shown, point number (PT#) is
automatically incremented. INPUT ––– ––– ENTER

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) When the inputted point name data as FROM or TO, does not exist in the same file, an error will be
displayed.

9-11
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.5 Delete a Coordinate Data from a File

Coordinate data in a file can be erased.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT P↓
3 Press the [F2](DELETE COORD.) key. [F2] SELECT A FILE
FN:_________

INPUT LIST ––– ENTER

4 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter File Name. [F1] DELETE COORD.
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter FN PT#:_________
[F4]
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
5 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter PT#. [F1] N: 100.234 m
Press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PT# E: 12.345 m
[F4] Z: 1.678 m
>DELETE? [YES][NO]
6 Confirm the data and press the [F3](YES) key. [F3]
Deleting starts.
The display will return to the previous display.

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

9-12
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.6 Editing PCODE Library

PCODE data can be entered into PCODE Library in this mode.
A PCODE is linked with a number of 1 to 50
PCODE can be also edited in DATA COLLECT menu 2/3 in the same way.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR. ) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN. P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT P↓
3 Press the [F3](PCODE INPUT) key. [F3]
→001:TOPCON
002:TOKYO
EDIT ––– CLR –––
4 By pressing the following keys, the list will [ ] or [ ] 011:URAH
increase or decrease.
[ ] or [ ] → 012:AMIDAT
[ ] or [ ]: Increasing or Decreasing one by one 013:HILLTO
[ ] or [ ]: By ten Increasing or Decreasing. EDIT ––– CLR –––
5 Press the [F1](EDIT) key. [F1] 011:URAH
→ 012=AMIDAT
013:HILLTO
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
6 Enter PCODE and press the [F4](ENT) key. *1) Enter PCODE 011:URAH
[F4] → 012:AMISUN
013:HILLTO
EDIT ––– CLR –––

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

9-13
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.7 Data Communications

You can send a data file stored in the internal memory to a computer directly. Also, you can directly load
a coordinate data file and PCODE Library data to the internal memory from the computer.

9.7.1 Sending Data

Example: Sending a Measured data file

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key twice. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 3/3
[F4] F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the [F1](DATA TRANSFER) key. [F1] SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
ENTER
4 Press the [F2](RS-232C) key.*1) [F2]

5 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] DATA TRANSFER

F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT

6 Select data format. [F1] DATA TRANSFER

GTS format: The conventional data F1:SEND DATA
SSS format: Including PCODE data, ‘From’ and
F2:LOAD DATA
‘To’ data for Point to Line.
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
7 Press the [F1] (SEND DATA) key. [F1] SEND DATA
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE DATA
8 Select the type of data to send by pressing [F1]- [F1] SELECT A FILE
[F3] key. FN:_________
Example : [F1](MEAS. DATA)
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
9 Press the [F1](INPUT) key and enter File Name [F1] SEND MEAS. DATA
you want to send. Press the [F4](ENT) key. Enter FN
*2),3),4) [F4] >OK ?
––– ––– [YES][NO]

9-14
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

10 Press the [F3](YES) key .*5) [F3] SEND MEAS. DATA

The sending starts.
The display will return to menu.
< Sending Data!>
STOP

*1) Only for built-in Bluetooth model

*2) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*3) To scroll the data, press the [ ] or [ ] key.
*4) To show the file list, press the [F2](LIST) key.
*5) To cancel the sending, press the [F4](STOP) key.

9-15
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.7.2 Loading Data

Coordinate data files and PCODE Library data can be loaded from PC.
Example: Loading a coordinate data file

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key twice. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 3/3
[F4] F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the [F1](DATA TRANSFER) key. [F1] SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
ENTER
4 Press the [F2](RS-232C) key. *1) [F2]

5 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] DATA TRANSFER

F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT

6 Press the [F1](GTS FORMAT) key. [F1] DATA TRANSFER

F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
7 Press the [F2](LOAD DATA) key. [F2] LOAD DATA
F1:COORD. DATA
F2:PCODE DATA

8 Select the type of data to load by pressing [F1] COORD. FILE NAME
[F1] or [F2] key. FN=_________
Example : [F1](COORD. DATA)
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
9 Enter New File Name you want to receive. Press Enter FN LOAD COORD. DATA
the [F4](ENT) key. *2) [F4]
>OK ?
––– ––– [YES][NO]
10 Press the [F3](YES) key.*3) [F3] LOAD COORD. DATA
The loading starts.
The display will return to menu.
< Loading Data!>
STOP

*1) Only for built-in Bluetooth model

*2) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*3) To cancel the loading, press the [F4](STOP) key.

9-16
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.7.3 Setting Parameter of Data Communications

z Items of the Parameter

Item Selecting Item Contents

[ACK/NAK], Setting Protocol

F1: Protocol
[ONE WAY] [ACK/NAK] or [ONE WAY] communication

1200, 2400, 4800, Setting transfer speed

F2: Baud rate
9600, 19200, 38400 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud

[7/EVEN], [7/ODD], Setting data length and parity.

F3: Char. / Parity [8/NON] [7bit, even], [7bit, odd], [8bit,none]
F1: Stop Bits 1, 2 Setting Stop 1 bit or 2bits

z Example Setting Baud rate : 19200 baud

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key twice. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 3/3
[F4] F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the [F1](DATA TRANSFER) key. [F1] SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
ENTER
4 Press the [F2](RS-232C) key. *1) [F2]

5 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] DATA TRANSFER

F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT

6 Press the [F1](GTS FORMAT) key. [F1] DATA TRANSFER

F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
7 Press the [F3](COMM. PARAMETERS) key. [F3] COMM. PARAMETERS 1/2
F1:PROTOCOL
F2:BAUD RATE
F3:CHAR./PARITY P↓
8 Press the [F2](BAUD RATE) key. [F2] BAUD RATE
[ ] indicates present setting. [1200] 2400 4800
9600 19200 38400
ENTER
9 Select the items by pressing [ ] or [ ], [ ] [ ] BAUD RATE
and [ ] keys. *2) [ ] 1200 2400 4800
9600 [19200]38400
ENTER

9-17
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

10 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] COMM. PARAMETERS 1/2

F1:PROTOCOL
F2:BAUD RATE
F3:CHAR./PARITY P↓

*1) Only for built-in Bluetooth model

*2) To cancel setting, press the [ESC] key.

9.7.4 Confirming the parameters for Bluetooth communication

(Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
The communication parameters for the Bluetooth are fixed as follows. You can only confirm the
parameters in Memory manager mode.

z Fixed parameters for Bluetooth communication

Item Fixed parameters

Baud rate 38400 baud (Maximum effective speed)

Char. / Parity 8bit, none

Stop Bits Stop 1 bit

9-18
 9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE

9.8 Initialization
This mode is used to initialize the internal memory.
Following data can be initialized.
FILE DATA :All files of measuring data and coordinate data
PCODE DATA: PCODE LIST
ALL DATA: FILE DATA and PCODE DATA
Note that the following data are not initialized even if initialization is executed.
: Coordinates of the instrument, Instrument height and Reflector height.

Example Initialization: ALL DATA (FILE data and PCODE data)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Press the [F3](MEMORY MGR.) key from the [F3] MEMORY MGR. 1/3
menu 1/3. F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN. P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key twice. [F4] MEMORY MGR. 3/3
[F4] F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the [F2](INITIALIZE) key. [F2] INITIALIZE
F1:FILE AREA
F2:PCODE LIST
F3:ALL DATA
4 Select the data to initialize by pressing one of the [F3] INITIALIZE DATA
[F1] to [F3] key. ERASE ALL DATA !
Example : [F3](ALL DATA)
>OK ? [NO][YES]
5 Confirm the erase data, press the [F4](YES) key. [F4] INITIALIZE DATA
Initializing will start.
<Initializing!>
The display returns to menu.

MEMORY MGR. 3/3

F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓

9-19
 10 SET AUDIO MODE

10 SET AUDIO MODE

The light acceptance quantity level for the EDM (SIGNAL), the atmospheric correction value (PPM),
correction value of prism constant (PSM) and correction value of non-prism constant (NPM) are
displayed in this mode.
When reflected light from the prism is received a buzzer sounds. This function is good for easy
collimation when the target is difficult to find.

Operating procedure Operation Display

HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.456 m
1 Press the [F4] key to get the soft key page 2 in the VD: 5.678 m
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
coordinate measurement. [F4] OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F3](S/A) key to change to set audio [F3] PSM:0.0 PPM 0.0
mode. NPM:0.0
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
The display indicates correction value of prism
constant (PSM), non-prism constant (NPM)
PRISM PPM T-P –––
atmospheric correction (PPM) and reflection light
level (SIGNAL).
z When receiving reflected light, buzzer sounds.
It is possible to stop the sound, see Chapter 16 “SELECTING MODE” .
z The [F1] to [F3] keys are used for setting atmospheric correction and prism constant.
z To return to normal measuring mode, press the [ESC] key.

10-1
 11 SETTING THE PRISM / NON-PRISM CONSTANT VALUE

11 SETTING THE PRISM / NON-PRISM CONSTANT

VALUE
The prism constant value of Topcon is set to zero. When using prisms other than Topcon’s, it is
necessary to set the prism constant correction value of that specific prism.
Once you set the correction value for prism constant, it is retained after power is OFF.

Note: Confirm the non-prism constant value is set at 0 when measuring target such as walls in
Non-prism mode.

Operating procedure Operation Display

HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.456 m
1 Press the [F4] key to get the soft key page 2 in the VD: 5.678 m
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
coordinate measurement. [F4] OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F3](S/A). [F3] PSM:0.0 PPM 0.0
NPM:0.0
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P –––
3 Press the [F1](PRISM) key. [F1] PRISM CONST. SET
PRISM =0.0 mm
N-PSM :0.0 mm
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Input the Prism constant correction value. *1) Enter data PSM:14.0 PPM 0.0
The display returns to set audio mode. [F4] NPM:0.0
PRISM: Prism Constant Correction Value
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
N-PSM: Non-prism Constant Correction Value
PRISM PPM T-P –––

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input range : –99.9mm to +99.9mm,0.1mm step

11-1
 12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

The velocity of light through air is not constant and depends on the atmospheric temperature and
pressure. The atmospheric correction system of this instrument corrects automatically when the
correction value is set. 15°C/59°F, and 1013.25hPa / 760mmHg / 29.9 inHg is as a standard value for
0ppm in this instrument. The values are kept in the memory even after power is OFF.

12.1 Calculation of Atmospheric Correction

The followings are the correction formulas. Unit; meter
⎧ Ka: Atmospheric correction value
Ka = ⎨ 279.85 – 79.585 × P- ⎫⎬ × 10 –6
--------------------------- P : Ambient atmospheric pressure (hPa)
⎩ 273.15 + t ⎭ t : Ambient Atmospheric temperature (°C)
The distance L (m) after atmospheric correction is obtained as follow.
L = l (1+Ka) l :Measured distance when atmospheric
correction is not set.

Example : In case Temperature +20°C, Air pressure 847hPa, l =1000 m

⎧ ⎫
× 847- ⎬ × 10 –6
Ka = ⎨ 279.85 – 79.585
---------------------------------
⎩ 273.15 + 20 ⎭

+ 50×10-6(50 ppm)
L = 1000 (1+50×10-6) = 1000.050 m

12.2 Setting of Atmospheric Correction Value

z How to Set Temperature and Pressure Value Directly
Measure the temperature and air pressure surrounding the instrument beforehand.
Example : Temperature: +26°C, Pressure:1017 hPa

Operating procedure Operation Display

HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.456 m
1 Press the [F4] key to get the soft key page 2 in the VD: 5.678 m
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the [F4] MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
coordinate measurement. OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F3](S/A) key to set Set Audio Mode [F3] PSM:0.0 PPM 0.0
from distance or coordinate measurement mode. NPM:0.0
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P –––
3 Press the [F3](T-P) key. [F3] TEMP. & PRES. SET
TEMP. = 15.0 °C
PRES. : 1013.2 hPa
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Input Temperature value and Pressure value.*1) Enter Temp. TEMP. & PRES. SET
Mode returns to Set Audio mode. Enter Pres. TEMP. : 26.0 °C
PRES. : 1017.0 hPa
INPUT ––– ––– ENTER

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Range : Temp. –30 to +60°C (0.1°C step) or –22 to +140°F (0.1°F step)
Pres. 560 to 1066.0hPa (0.1hPa step) ,420 to 800mmHg (0.1mmHg step) or
16.5 to 31.5inHg (0.1inHg step)

12-1
 12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

z How to Set the Atmospheric Correction Value Directly

Measure the temperature and air pressure to find atmospheric correction value (PPM) from the chart or
correction formula.

Operating procedure Operation Display

HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.456 m
1 Press the [F4] key to get the soft key page 2 in the VD: 5.678 m
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the [F4] MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
coordinate measurement. OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the [F3](S/A) key to set Set Audio Mode [F3] PSM:0.0 PPM 0.0
from distance or coordinate measurement mode. NPM:0.0
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P –––
3 Press the [F2](PPM) key. [F2] PPM SET
Current setting value is displayed. PPM = 0.0 ppm

--- --- [CLR] [ENT]

4 Enter atmospheric correction value. *1) Enter Data
[F4]
Mode returns to Set Audio mode.

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

z Input range : –999.9ppm to +999.9ppm,0.1ppm step

12-2
 12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

Atmospheric Correction Chart (For your reference)

The atmospheric correction value is obtained easily with the atmospheric correction chart. Find the
measured temperature in horizontal, and pressure in vertical on the chart.
Read the value from the diagonal line, which represents the required atmospheric correction value.

Example:
The measured temperature is +26°C
The measured pressure is 1013 hPa
There fore,
The correction value is +10ppm

12-3
 12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

12-4
 12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION

12-5
 13 CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION AND EARTH CURVATURE

13 CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION AND EARTH

CURVATURE
The instrument measures distance, taking into account correction for refraction and earth curvature.

13.1 Distance Calculation Formula

Distance Calculation Formula; with correction for refraction and earth curvature taken into account.
Follow the Formula below for converting horizontal and vertical distances.

Horizontal distance D = AC(α) or BE(β)

Vertical distance Z =BC(α) or EA(β)
D = L{cosα–(2θ – γ ) sinα}
Z = L{sinα+(θ – γ ) cosα}
θ = L•cosα/2R........... Earth curvature
correcting item
γ =K•Lcosα/2R....... Atmospheric
refraction
correcting item
K =0.14 or 0.2.......... Coefficient of
refraction
R =6372km.............. Radius of earth
α (or β)................... Altitude angle
L .............................. Slope distance

z The conversion formula for horizontal and vertical distances is as follows when correction for
refraction and earth curvature is not applied.
D=L•cosα
Z=L•sinα

Note: The coefficient of the instrument has been set at 0.14 before shipment (K=0.14).
if the "K" value is to be changed, refer to 16 “SELECTING MODE”.

13-1
 14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING

14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING

14.1 On-board Battery BT-52QA
z To remove
Push the battery locking lever and pull out the BT-52QA on-board battery as shown below.

z To charge
Outlet
BT-52QA

BC-27M

1 Connect the AC-cable to the charger.

2 Plug the AC-plug into the outlet.
(The CHARGE lamp will light up in red.)
3 Connect the charger connector to the battery.
Preparatory charging* will start.
When the preparatory charging is completed, the charging status will be switched to quick charging
automatically. (The CHARGE lamp will light up in orange.)
4 Charging will take approximately 1.8 hours. (The CHARGE lamp will light up in green.)
5 After charging, remove the battery from the charger.
Remove the charger from the outlet.

*About preparatory charging

Before quick charging, the battery is charged using small amount current to measure its temperature
and voltage.
When the temperature and voltage is within a range, the charging status will change to quick charging.

z To refresh
Press the refresh switch* after starting charging above steps 1, 2 or 3, then discharging will start. (The
DISCHARGE lamp will light up in yellow.)
After discharging is finished, charging will start automatically.
Time discharging battery charged fully is approximately 9 hours.

*For refreshing
Rechargeable battery can be used repeatedly by charging.
If charging is repeated by the state that capacity of the battery still left, operating time of the battery may
shorten. In this case, the voltage of the battery will be recovered by refreshing and operating time can
be improved.

14-1
 14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING

z The lamp of charger(BC-27M)

CHARGE Lamp
Red ON : Waiting
Orange blinking : Waiting until internal temperature falls
Orange ON : Charging
Orange lamp will light up during charging.
Green ON : Charging completed
Green lamp will light up after completely charging.
Red blinking or [ Red ON -> Orange ON -> OFF ] (The pattern repeats.)
: Abnormal outbreaks
The lamp will flash or light up when the battery life is over or the battery is broken down.
Replace the battery to new one.
DISCHARGE Lamp
Yellow ON : Discharging
Yellow lamp will light up and discharging will start by pressing the refresh (discharge) switch.
z To install
Place the base of the on-board battery into the GPT-3200N/NW series, push the on-board battery
toward the instrument side till the battery clicks into position.

z Do not charge or discharge continuously, otherwise the battery and the charger may be
deteriorated. If charging or discharging is necessary, use the charger after stopping charge for
approximately 30 minutes.
z Do not charge the battery or discharge the battery in right after the battery is charged, it causes
deterioration of the battery in rare cases.
z The charger may develop heat while charging, there is no problem of it.

Note: 1 Recharging should take place in a room with an ambient temperature range of 10°C to
40°C (50°F to 104°F).
2 If charging is done at high temperature, charging time of the battery may take longer.
3 Exceeding the specified charging time may shorten the life of the battery and should be
avoided if possible.
4 The battery source will discharge when stored and should be checked before using with
instrument .
5 Be sure to charge as stored battery source every 3 or 4 months and store in a place at
30°C and below when it will not used for a long period.
If you allow the battery to be completely discharged, it will have an effect on the overall
performance for proper charging in the future.
Keep batteries charged at all times.
6 For further information, see APPENDIX 2 “PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT”.

14-2
 15 DETACH/ATTACH OF TRIBRACH

15 DETACH/ATTACH OF TRIBRACH
The instrument is easily detached or attached to the tribrach, with a tribrach locking lever loosened or
tightened for this purpose.

z Detachment
1 Loosen the tribrach locking lever, by revolving it 180° or 200gon in the counterclockwise direction
(which will point the triangle mark upwards).
2 Grip the carrying handle firmly with one hand while holding the tribrach with the other. Then lift the
instrument straight upwards and off.

z Attachment
1 Hold the instrument by the carrying handle, with one hand, and carefully lower it on top of the
tribrach while, at the same time, coinciding the alignment piece with the tribrach alignment groove
on the instrument and tribrach respectively.
2 When fully seated, revolve the tribrach locking lever 180° or 200gon clockwise (which will point the
triangle mark downwards again).
3 Confirm that the upper instrument section is securely attached.

Alignment piece

Alignment groove

Securing screw
Tribrach locking lever

z Locking the Tribrach Locking Lever

The tribrach locking lever can be locked, to prevent it be accidentally removed, especially if the
upper instrument section is not being detached very often. Simply tighten the securing screw on the
locking lever with the accessory screwdriver, found in the case.

15-1
 16 SELECTING MODE

16 SELECTING MODE
16.1 Items of the Selecting Mode
The following modes are available.

Menu Items Selecting item Display

1: TEMP. & °C / °F Select the unit of temperature for atmospheric
UNIT SET PRES. hPa / mmHg /inHg correction. Select the unit of air pressure for
atmospheric correction.
ANGLE DEG(360°) / Choose degree, gon or mil unit for measuring
GON(400G) / angle.
MIL(6400M)
DISTANCE m / ft / ft + in Choose measuring unit for distance meter , feet or
feet and inch
FEET US SURVEY / Select the meter / feet conversion factor.
INTERNATIONAL US SURVEY feet
1m = 3.280833333333333 ft.
INTERNATIONAL feet
1m = 3.280839895013123 ft.
2: POWER ON ANGLE MEAS./ Select to set the measurement mode for angle or
MODE SET MODE DISTANCE MEAS. distance when the power is turned on.
FINE/CRS/ FINE / COARSE / Select Fine /Coarse / Tracking mode in distance
TRK TRACK measurement mode, when the power is turned on.
HD&VD/SD HD&VD /SD Specify which is displayed first, horizontal and
vertical distance or slope distance, when the power
is turned on.
V ANGLE ZENITH 0 / Choose the vertical angle reading from zenith or
Z0/H0 HORIZONTAL 0 from level.
N-TIMES / N-TIMES / Select the measurement mode for distance when
REPEAT REPEAT the power is turned on.
TIMES OF 0~99 Set N (number of times) for times of distance
MEAS. measurement. When setting number of times as
1or 0, it is single measurement.
NEZ / ENZ NEZ / ENZ Select a coordinate displaying order either NEZ or
ENZ.
HA MEMORY ON / OFF Horizontal angle set can be retained after the power
is turned off.
ESC KEY DATA COLLECT / You can select a function of the [ESC] key.
MODE LAYOUT / REC / DATA COLLECT / LAYOUT: It is possible to enter
OFF data input mode (in DATA COLLECT) or Layout
Menu from normal measuring mode directly.
REC: While executing normal or offset measuring,
the measuring data can be output.
OFF: Returns to normal function.
COORD. ON / OFF Select coordinate displaying ON or OFF when
CHECK setting a point.

16-1
 16 SELECTING MODE

EDM OFF 0-99 The time when EDM is cut off from distance
TIME measurement is completed can be changed. This
function is effective for shortening the first time
measuring time when distance
measurement is started from distance
measurement completing state. (Default:3minutes)
0 :After completing distance measurement,
EDM is cut off immediately.
1-98 :EDM is cut off after 1~98 minutes.
99 :EDM is always switched ON.
FINE 0.2mm/1mm Select 1mm or 0.2mm for the minimum reading
READING unit in the distance mode (FINE mode).
OFFSET V FREE / HOLD Select Vertical angle setting in the Angle Offset
ANG measurement mode.
FREE: Vertical angle varies by the angle of the
telescope.
HOLD: Vertical angle is fixed even if the angle of
the telescope changes.
NON-PSM / NON-PRISM / Select the distance measurement mode when the
PRISM PRISM power is turned ON.
L.PL OFF 1 -99 Laser plummet function can be turned off
TIME automatically.
(Only for Laser 1-98 : Laser Plummet is cut off after 1 to 98
plummet type) minutes.
99 : Manual
3: H-ANGLE ON / OFF Specify whether the buzzer sounds or not for every
OTHERS BUZZER horizontal angle 90°.
SET S/A BUZZER ON / OFF Specify whether the buzzer sounds or not in the set
audio mode.
W- OFF / 0.14 / 0.20 Set correction for refraction and earth curvature,
CORRECTI coefficient of refraction as ; K=0.14, K=0.20 or no
ON correction.
NEZ ON / OFF It is possible to retain the coordinate of instrument
MEMORY point, the instrument height and prism height after
power off.
REC TYPE REC-A / REC-B Select REC-A or REC-B for data output.
REC-A : The measurement is made again and this
new data is output.
REC-B : The data being displayed is output.
CR,LF ON / OFF It is possible to output the data with carriage return
and line feed.
NEZ REC STANDARD / Select to record coordinates in standard or with raw
FORM with RAW / data.
STANDARD -
12Dig /
with RAW - 12Dig
MANUAL ON/ OFF In the layout mode or data collect mode, it is
NEZ REC possible to record coordinates entered directly from
the keyboard.
LANGUAGE * ENGLISH/ Select the displaying language.
OTHER *

16-2
 16 SELECTING MODE

ACK MODE STANDARD / Set the procedure of the communication with

OMITTED external device.
STANDARD:Normal procedure
OMITTED: Even though the [ACK] is omitted from
the external device, the data is not
sent again.
GRID USE G.F. / Select using GRID FACTOR in calculation of
FACTOR DON’T USE measurement data.
CUT & FILL STANDARD / In the layout mode, CUT & FILL can be displayed
CUT&FILL instead of dZ.
ECHO BACK ON / OFF It is possible to output the data of echo back type.
CONTRAST ON / OFF When the instrument is turned ON, it is possible to
MENU display the screen which you can adjust contrast of
the display and confirm the prism constant (PSM),
non-prism constant (NPM) and atmospheric
correction value (PPM).
PASSWORD ON / OFF When the instrument is turned ON, the screen to
*2 request the password will appear. *3

*1 LANGUAGE selection varies depending on countries.

*2 Applicable only to the instruments with security function
*3 If you forget a password, the instrument needs repair to cancel the password. Please contact
Topcon or your local Topcon dealer.

16.2 How to Set Selecting Mode

<Example> : Setting unit in hPa, °F, NEZ MEMORY:ON

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 While pressing [F2] key, turn power ON. [F2] PARAMETERS 2
+ F1:UNIT SET
Power ON F2:MODE SET
F3:OTHERS SET
2 Press [F1](UNIT SET ) key. [F1] UNIT SET 1/2
F1:TEMP. & PRES.
F2:ANGLE
F3:DISTANCE P↓
3 Press [F1](TEMP. & PRES.) key. [F1] TEMP. & PRES. UNIT
TEMP. : °C
PRES. : mmHg
°C °F ––– ENTER
4 Press [F2](°F) key, and press [F2] TEMP. & PRES. UNIT
[F4](ENTER) key. [F4] TEMP. : °F
PRES. : mmHg
hPa mmHg inHg ENTER
5 Press [F1](hPa) key, and press [F4] (ENTER) key. [F1] UNIT SET 1/2
Returns to unit set menu. [F4] F1:TEMP. & PRES.
F2:ANGLE
F3:DISTANCE

16-3
 16 SELECTING MODE

6 Press [ESC] key. [ESC] PARAMETERS 2

Returns to PARAMETERS 2 menu. F1:UNIT SET
F2:MODE SET
F3:OTHERS SET
7 Press [F3](OTHERS SET) key. [F3] OTHERS SET 1/5
F1:H-ANGLE BUZZER
F2:S/A BUZZER
F3:W-CORRECTION P↓
8 Press [F4](P↓) key, to get the function in page 2 . [F4] OTHERS SET 2/5
F1:NEZ MEMORY
F2:REC TYPE
F3:CR,LF P↓
9 Press [F1] key. [F1] NEZ MEMORY [OFF]

[ON] [OFF] ––– ENTER

10 Press [F1](ON) key, and press [F4] (ENTER) key. [F1] OTHERS SET 2/5
Returns to OTHERS SET menu. [F4] F1:NEZ MEMORY
F2:REC TYPE
F3:CR,LF P↓

11 Power off Power OFF

16-4
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.1 Checking and adjusting of instrument constant
Note: Each of the Prism mode and Non-prism mode has instrument constant.
Check and adjust in both non-prism and prism modes to obtain an instrument constant for
each.

Normally, the instrument constant does not have discrepancy. It is recommended you measure and
compare with an accurately measured distance at a location where the precision is specifically
monitored on a consistent basis. If such a location is not available, establish your own base line over
20m (when purchasing the instrument) and compare with the data measured with newly purchased
instrument.
In both cases note that the setup displacement of the instrument position over the point, the prism,
baseline precision, poor collimation, atmospheric correction, and correction for refraction and earth
curvature determine the inspection precision. Please keep in mind these points.
Also, when providing a base line in a building, please note that the difference in temperature greatly
changes the length measured in the building.
If the difference between the measured length of the baseline and the actual length exceeds the range
of the nominal accuracy, change the instrument constant of the prism mode according to the following
procedure.

1) On a basically horizontal line of about 100 meters, line AB, establish point C. Measure each
distance, AB, AC and BC, about 10 times, and calculate the average value for each.

A B
C

2) Repeat Step 1 several times. Then calculate the variance with the current instrument constant (ΔK).

ΔK = AB - (AC + BC)

3) Calculate the new instrument constant according to the formula below. Then reset the instrument
constant according to Section 17.4 “How to Set the Instrument Constant Value”.

New instrument constant = current instrument constant + ΔK

4) Once again, measure the baseline and compare the results to the baseline’s actual length.
Repeat the same procedure in non-prism mode as well.

5) If the results of the measurement conducted in Step 4 exceed the range of the nominal accuracy,
contact TOPCON or your TOPCON dealer.

17-1
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.2 Checking the Optical Axis

17.2.1Checking the optical axis of EDM and theodolite

Check each of the optical axis of EDM and theodolite about prism mode and non-prism mode in order.

To check if the optical axis of EDM and theodolite are matched, follow the procedure below.
It is especially important to check after adjustment of the eyepiece reticle is carried out.
1) Position a prism about 30 to 50m apart from GPT-3200N/NW series.
2)Turn the power ON while pressing the [F1] key.
ADJUSTMENT MODE 1/2 Adjustment mode menu 1/2 will appear.
F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
F2:INST. CONSTANT
F3:V0 AXIS P↓
3)Press the [F4](P↓) key to get the menu 2/2.
ADJUSTMENT MODE 2/2 Press the [F1] key to select the EDM CHECK
F1:EDM CHECK mode.

P↓
4)Collimate the center of a prism by prism mode.
The buzzer will sound.
V: 90° 10'10"
HR: 20° 00'20"
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
EXIT NP/P HOLD
5)Press the [F4](hold) key to hold the quantity of
V: 90° 10'10" the light.
The mark "#" will appear on the right side of the
HR: 00° 04'20"
signal level indicator.
SIGNAL:[IIIII] #
EXIT NP/P HOLD

z H direction confirmation (Do not move V direction).

6) Turn the horizon tangent screw, move the collimating point to the left side of prism gradually until
buzzer sound stops.

Prism

Reticle

17-2
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

7) Turn the horizontal tangent screw slowly, and move the collimating point to the prism center
gradually until at the position buzzer starts.
Confirm the level of the signal (light quantity level) in display to adjust at the level of one to two as
shown in below by turning the horizontal tangent screw.

Prism

Reticle

V: 90° 10'10"
HR: 00° 01'20"
SIGNAL:[II ] #
EXIT NP/P HOLD
Quantity level two
8) Press the [ESC] key and measure the horizontal angle, and note the horizontal angle displayed. Or
you can do 0-set of horizontal angle.
9) Return to the Set Audio mode again.
10) Turn the horizon tangent screw, move the collimating point to the right side of prism gradually until
buzzer sound stops.

Prism

Reticle

11) Move the collimating point to the center of prism gradually until buzzer sound starts.
Turning the horizontal tangent screw to be one to two level of SIG value to adjust the collimating
point same as step 6 procedure.
12) Note horizontal angle same as step 6 procedure.
13) Calculate the horizontal angle of center of the prism by step 7 and 11.

[Example] Step 7 : 0°01'20"

Step 11 : 0°09'40"

Calculated value 0°04'10"

14) Climate to the center of prism.

Compare the reading horizontal angle and calculated average value in step 12.

[Example] Horizontal angle of the center of the prism: 0°04'30"

Difference of Average value and Horizontal reading of the center of the prism : 20"

If the difference is within 2', no problem for use.

17-3
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

z Vertical direction confirmation (Do not move Horizontal direction).

15) Carry out as Horizontal direction confirmation.

Compare the reading vertical angle of center of prism and calculated average value.
If the difference is within 2', no problem for use.
Prism

Reticle

[Example] Lower side of prism 90°12'30"

Upper side of prism 90°04'30"

Average 90°08'30"

Reading to prism center 90°08'50"

Difference 20"

If the difference is more than mentioned value, contact with your Topcon dealer or Topcon.

z For non-prism mode

If the instrument is in the hold mode, press the [F4](HOLD) key to release the hold mode.

16)Press the [F3](NP/P) key to change the non-

V: 90° 10'10" prism mode.
HR: 00° 04'20" N
P 17)Collimate the center of the prism.
SIGNAL:[IIIII] # 18)Press the [F4](hold) key to hold the quantity of
EXIT NP/P HOLD the light.
The mark "#" will appear on the right side of the
signal level indicator.

V: 90° 10'10"
N
HR: 00° 04'20" P
SIGNAL:[IIIII] #
EXIT NP/P HOLD
19)Repeat above procedure 6 to 15 in the same
way in the non-prism mode.
If the difference is within 2', no problem for use.
If the difference is more than mentioned value,
contact with your Topcon dealer or Topcon.

17-4
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.2.2Checking the optical axis of Laser pointer

Check whether the optical axis of the laser pointer coincides with the optical axis of the telescope by
carrying out the following steps.

The laser pointer indicates the approximate collimation position of the telescope. It does not indicate
the exact collimation position.
Therefore, it is not failure of the GPT-3200N/NW although it may shift to 6mm by the optical axis and
laser point on the target about 10 meters from the GPT-3200N/NW.

1) On the center of a piece of graph paper or white paper, draw a target in the form of a vertical line
and an intersecting horizontal line.
2) Set up the target about 10 meters from the GPT-3200N/NW, and collimate the GPT-3200N/NW to
the point of intersection of the two lines.
3) Turn on power to the GPT-3200N/NW, press the star key mode, and then press the L. P. key,
lighting up the laser pointer.

Target

About10m

z Checking of laser pointer's optical axis

4) With the GPT-3200N/NW collimated to the point of intersection of the two lines, check whether the
center of the laser pointer is within about 6 mm of the point of intersection.
Note: If you look through the telescope at this time, you will not be able to see the laser pointer.
Therefore, conduct this check with the naked eye, viewing the target and the laser pointer
from the side of, or from above, the GPT-3200N/NW.

5) If the center of the laser pointer is within about 6 mm of the point of intersection, there will be no
problems with using the GPT-3200N/NW. If the distance is greater than 6 mm, carry out the
following steps to align the center of the laser pointer with the point of intersection, and to align the
laser pointer's optical axis with that of the telescope.

z Adjusting the laser pointer's optical axis

6) As shown in the drawing, remove the 3 rubber caps on top of the instrument, revealing the
adjustment screws.
7) Using the accessory hexagonal wrench, adjust each of the screws - A, B and C - thereby moving
the laser pointer so that it coincides with the point of intersection.

17-5
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

About30°

The direction of the laser pointer

About30°

As seen from above

Adjustment screws

when screws A, B and C are turned clockwise (the direction for tightening them), the laser pointer, as
seen on the target from the standpoint of the GPT-3200N/NW, will move in the direction shown in the
drawing.

z Tighten the 3 screws so that they are equally tight.

z Do not lose the rubber caps of the adjustment screws.

17-6
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.3 Checking/Adjusting the Theodolite Functions

z Pointers on the Adjustment
1) Adjust the eyepiece of the telescope properly prior to any checking operation which involves
sighting through the telescope.
Remember to focus properly, with parallax completely eliminated.
2) Carry out the adjustments in the order of item numbers, as the adjustments are dependent one
upon another. Adjustments carried out in the wrong sequence may even nullify previous
adjustment.
3) Always conclude adjustments by tightening the adjustment screws securely (but do not tighten
them more than necessary, as you may strip the threads, twist off the screw or place undue stress
on the parts).
Furthermore, always tighten by revolving in the direction of tightening tension.
4) The attachment screws must also be tightened sufficiently, upon completion of adjustments.
5) Always repeat checking operations after adjustments are made, in order to confirm results.

z Notes on the Tribrach

Note that the angle measuring precision may be effected directly if the tribrach has not been installed
firmly.
1) If any leveling screw becomes loose and slack or if collimation is unstable due to the looseness of
leveling screws, adjust by tightening the adjusting screws (in 2 places) installed over each leveling
screw with a screwdriver
2) If there is any slack between the leveling screws and the base, loosen the set screw of the holding
ring and tighten the holding ring with adjusting pin, until it is properly adjusted. Re-tighten the set
screw on completing the adjustment.

Adjustment screw Adjustment screw

Leveling screw Holding ring Set screw

17-7
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.3.1Checking /Adjusting the Plate Level

Adjustment is required if the axis of the plate level is not perpendicular to the vertical axis.
z Check
1) Place the plate level parallel to a line running through the centers of two leveling screws, say, A and
B. Use these two leveling screws only and place the bubble in the center of the plate level.
2) Rotate the instrument 180° or 200gon around the vertical axis and check bubble movement of the
plate level. If the bubble has been displaced, then proceed with the following adjustment.

Plate level

Leveling screw A Leveling screw B

z Adjustment
1) Adjust the level adjustment capstan screw, with the accessory adjusting pin and return the bubble
towards the center of the plate level. Correct only one-half of the displacement by this method.
2) Correct the remaining amount of the bubble displacement with the leveling screws.
3) Rotate the instrument 180° or 200gon around the vertical axis once more and check bubble
movement. If the bubble is still displaced, then repeat the adjustment.

Level adjustment Total amount of displacement

capstan screw
Half amount of displacement

17.3.2Checking /Adjusting the Circular Level

Adjustment is required if the axis of the circular level is also not perpendicular to the vertical axis.
z Check
Carefully level the instrument with the plate level only. If the bubble of the circular level is centered
properly, adjustment is not required. Otherwise, proceed with the following adjustment.
z Adjustment
Shift the bubble to the center of the circular level, by adjusting three capstan adjustment screws on
the bottom surface of the circular level, with the accessory adjusting pin.

Capstan adjustment
screws

Bottom of the base

Circular level

17-8
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.3.3Adjustment of the Vertical Cross-hair

Adjustment is required if the vertical cross-hair is not in a place perpendicular to the horizontal axis of
the telescope (since it must be possible to use any point on the hair for measuring horizontal angles or
running lines).
z Check
1) Set the instrument up the tripod and carefully level it.
2) Sight the cross-hairs on a well defined Point A at a distance of, at least, 50 meters (160ft.) and
clamp horizontal motion.
3) Next swing the telescope vertically using the vertical tangent screw, and check whether the point
travels along the length of the vertical cross-hair.
4) If the point appears to move continuously on the hair, the vertical cross-hair lies in a plane
perpendicular to the horizontal axis (and adjustment is not required ).
5) However, if the point appears to be displaced from the vertical cross-hair, as the telescope is
swung vertically, then proceed with the following adjustment.

z Adjustment
1) Unscrew the cross-hair adjustment section cover, by revolving it in the counterclockwise direction,
and take it off. This will expose four eyepiece section attachment screws.

Eyepiece section
Eyepiece section attachment screws
attachment screws

Eyepiece

2) Loosen all four attachment screws slightly with the accessory screw-drive (while taking note of the
number of revolutions).
Then revolve the eyepiece section so that the vertical cross-hair coincides to Point A’.
Finally, re-tighten the four screws by the amount that they were loosened.
3) Check once more and if the point travels the entire length of the vertical cross-hair, further
adjustment is not required.

Note: Perform following adjustment after completing the above adjustment .

Section 17.3.4 “Collimation of the Instrument”, Section 17.3.7 “Adjustment of Vertical Angle
0 Datum”.

17-9
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.3.4Collimation of the Instrument

Collimation is required to make the line of sight of the telescope perpendicular to the horizontal axis of
the instrument, otherwise, it will not be possible to extend a straight line by direct means.
z Check Eyepiece
1) Set the instrument up with clear
sights of about 50 to 60meters
(160 to 200 ft.) on both sides of the
instrument.
2) Level the instrument properly with the
plate level.
3) Sight Point A at approximately 50
meters (160 ft.) distance.
Telescope
4) Loosen the vertical motion clamp
only, and rotate the telescope 180° or
200gon around the horizontal axis, so
that the telescope is pointed in the
opposite direction.
5) Sight Point B, at equal distance as
Point A and tighten the vertical
motion clamp.

6) Loosen the horizontal motion clamp

and rotate the instrument 180° or
200gon around the vertical axis. Fix a
sight on Point A once more and
tighten the horizontal motion clamp.

7) Loosen the vertical motion clamp

only and rotate the telescope 180°
or 200gon around the horizontal axis
once more and fix a sight on Point C,
which should coincide with previous
Point B.
8) If Points B and C do not coincide,
adjust in the following manner.

z Adjustment
1) Unscrew the cross-hair adjustment section cover.
2) Find Point D at a point between Points C and B, which should
be equal to 1/4th the distance between Points B and C and
measured from Point C. This is because the apparent error
between Points B and C is four times the actual error since
the telescope has been reversed twice during the checking
operation.

3)Shift the vertical cross-hair line and coincide it with

Point D, by revolving the left and right capstan
adjustment screws with the adjusting pin.Upon
Capstan completing the adjustment, repeat the checking
adjustment operation once more.
screws If Points B and C coincide, further adjustment is not
required. Otherwise, repeat the adjustment.

Capstan Eyepiece
adjustment
screws

17-10
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

Note: 1 First, loosen the capstan adjustment screw on the side to which the vertical cross-hair
line must be moved. Then tighten the adjustment screw on the opposite side by an equal
amount which will leave the tension of the adjustment screws unchanged.
Revolve in the counterclockwise direction to loosen and in the clockwise direction to
tighten, but revolve as little as possible.
2 Perform following adjustment after completing above adjustment . Section 17.3.7
“Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum”, Section 17.2 “Checking the Optical Axis”.

17.3.5Checking / Adjusting the Optical Plummet Telescope

Adjustment is required to make the line of sight of the optical plummet telescope coincide with the
vertical axis (otherwise the vertical axis will not be in the true vertical when the instrument is optically
plumbed).
z Check
1) Coincide the center mark and the point. (See Chapter 2 “PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT”.)
2) Rotate the instrument 180° or 200gon around the vertical axis and check the center mark.
If the point is properly centered in the center mark, adjustment is not required. Otherwise, adjust in
the following manner.

z Adjustment
1) Take off the adjustment section cover of the optical plummet telescope eyepiece. This will expose
four capstan adjustment screws which should be adjusted with the accessory adjusting pin to shift
the center mark to the point. However, correct only one-half of the displacement in this manner.
Capstan
adjustment
screws
Total amount of
displacement

Half amount of
Capstan displacement
Eyepiece
adjustment
screws
Plummet telescope

2) Use the leveling screws and coincide the point and center mark.
3) Rotate the instrument 180° or 200gon around the vertical axis once more and check the center
mark. If it is coincided to the point, then further adjustment is not required. Otherwise, repeat the
adjustment.

Note: First, loosen the capstan adjustment screw on the side to which the center mark must be
moved. Then tighten the adjustment screw on the opposite side by an equal amount which
will leave the tension of the adjustment screws unchanged.
Revolve in the counterclockwise direction to loosen and in the clockwise direction to tighten,
but revolve as little as possible.

17-11
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.3.6Checking / Adjusting the Laser Plummet (For Laser Plummet type)

z Check
1) Turn on the laser plummet and coincide the center of the laser with a measuring point.
2) Rotate the instrument 180° or 200gon around the vertical axis and check the measuring point.
If the laser is properly centered in the measuring point, adjustment is not required. Otherwise,
adjust in the following manner.

z Adjustment
1) Turn the cap located on the left side corner of the
instrument counterclockwise and remove it.
This will expose four adjustment screws which
should be adjusted with the accessory hexagonal
wrench. Cap
2) Shift the laser to the measuring point. However,
correct only one-half of the displacement in this
manner.

Total amount of
displacement
Adjustment Laser beam Half amount of
screws displacement

Adjustment screws
Measuring
point

3) Use the leveling screws and coincide the center of the laser and the point.
4) Rotate the instrument 180° or 200gon around the vertical axis once more and check the point and
the laser. If the laser is coincided to the measuring point, then further adjustment is not required.
Otherwise, repeat the adjustment.
Note: First, loosen the adjustment screw to move the laser. Then tighten the adjustment screw on the
opposite side by an equal amount which will leave the tension of the adjustment screws
unchanged.
Revolve in the counterclockwise direction to loosen and in the clockwise direction to tighten, but
revolve as little as possible.

Reference
The laser can be moved by turning the adjustment screws clockwise as follows.
Laser is moved down. Laser beam
Laser is moved left.

Laser is moved right.

Laser is moved up.

Top of view of the measuring point
Adjustment screws

17-12
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.3.7Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum

If when measuring the vertical angle of target A at telescope position normal (direct) and reverse
settings, the amount of normal and reverse measurements combined is other than 360° (ZENITH-0),
half of the difference from 360° is the error amount from corrected 0 setting. Carry out adjustment. As
adjustment for vertical angle 0 setting is the criteria for determining instrument coordinate origin, use
special care for adjustment.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Level the instrument properly with the
plate level.
2 While pressing the [F1]key, turn power switch ON. [F1] ADJUSTMENT MODE 1/2
+ F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
Power ON F2:INST. CONSTANT
F3:V0 AXIS P↓
3 Press the [F1] key. [F1] V0 ADJUSTMENT
<STEP-1> FRONT
V: 90°00'00"
ENTER
4 Collimate target A from the telescope properly in Collimate A
normal setting. (Normal)

5 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4] V0 ADJUSTMENT

<STEP-2> REVERSE
6 Collimate target A in reverse telescope setting. Collimate A V: 270°00'00"
(Reverse) ENTER
7 Press the [F4](ENTER) key. [F4]
Measured value is set and carry out normal angle
measurement.
<SET!>

V : 270°00'00"
HR: 120°30'40"

0SET HOLD HSET P1↓

8 Check that the total amount of normal and reverse

angular travel is 360° collimating the target A by
normal and reverse positions.

17-13
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.4 How to Set the Instrument Constant Value

To set the Instrument constant which is obtained in Section 17.1 “Check and adjusting of instrument
constant”, follow as below.

Note: Each of the Prism mode and Non-prism mode has instrument constant.
Check and adjust in both non-prism and prism modes to obtain an instrument constant for
each.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 While pressing the [F1] key, turn power switch [F1] ADJUSTMENT MODE
ON. + F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
POWER ON F2:INST. CONSTANT
F3:V0 AXIS P↓
2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] INST. CONSTANT SET
F1:PRISM
F2:NON-PRISM

3 Select the constant value by pressing the [F1] or [F1] or [F2] INST. CONSTANT SET
[F2] key. NON-PRISM
= - 0.6 mm
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter the constant value. *1),2) Enter value INST. CONSTANT SET
[F4] NON-PRISM
: - 0.7 mm
INPUT ––– ––– ENTER
5 Turn power switch OFF. Power OFF

*1) Refer to Section 2.5 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

*2) To cancel the setting, press the [ESC] key.

17-14
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.5 Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of Instrument

(Only for GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Level the instrument properly with the [F1] ADJUSTMENT MODE 1/2
plate level. + F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
Power ON F2:INST. CONSTANT
2 While pressing the [F1] key, turn power switch ON. F3:V0 AXIS P↓
3 Press the [F3] key. [F3] AV0 AXIS
F1:MEASUREMENT
F2:CONSTANT LIST

4 Press the [F1] key. [F1]

V0/AXIS ADJUSTMENTS

ERROR CORRECTION
(A)COLLIMATION
(B)H AXIS

5 Collimate target A (around 0° in horizontal within Collimate FRONT FACE1 /0

±3°) in normal telescope setting (FACE (1)). A V: 89°55'50"
(Normal) LEVEL ±0
SKIP SET
6 Press the [F4](SET) key. *1) [F4]
The sample display shows that the measurement
is made 5 times in FACE 1.
7 Turn the telescope in reverse telescope setting Turn REVERSE FACE2 /5
(FACE (2)). telescope V: 270°04'20"
LEVEL ±0
8 Collimate target A. Collimate SET
A
(Reverse)

9 Press the [F4](SET) key. [F4]

Repeat the procedures in step 8 and 9 so that the (B)HORIZONTAL AXIS
count of measured times matches to the one in
FACE(1). *2),3),4)

The title display will be shown automatically.

10 Collimate target B (more than ±10° from the level) Collimate REVERSE FACE 2 /0
in reverse telescope setting B V: 270°04'20"
(FACE(2)). *5) (Reverse) LEVEL ±10°
SET
11 Press the [F4](SET) key. *5) [F4]

17-15
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

12 Turn the telescope in normal telescope setting Turn FRONT FACE 1 /5

(FACE(1)). telescope V: 89°55'50"
LEVEL ±10°
13 Collimate target B. Collimate SKIP SET
B
(Normal)

14 Press the [F4](SET) key. Repeat the procedures in [F4]

step 13 and 14 so that the count of measured COMPLETE
times matches to the one in FACE(2).
Then the display returns to main menu.

z To show the constant list of systematic error of ADJUSTMENT MODE 1/2

instrument
F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
F2:INST. CONSTANT
F3:V0 AXIS P↓
1 Press the [F3] key from Adjustment Mode menu 1/ [F3] V0 AXIS
2. F1:MEASUREMENT
F2:CONSTANT LIST

2 Press the [F2] key. [F2] VCo: -1°57'12"

Correction values are displayed. HCo: -0°00'20"
HAx: -0°00'20"
EXIT
3 Press the [F1] key. [F1]
The display returns to previous menu.

*1) It is able to get the average value from 1 to 10 measurements. To get the average, repeat the
procedures in steps 5, 6 or 10, 11. The measured times is counted in the second line of display.
*2) The compensation values of 1) Error of vertical axis (X,Y tilt sensor offset), 2) Collimation error, and 3)
Error of vertical angle 0datum will be set and memorized internally.
*3) The operating procedure steps to set compensation value of 4) Error of horizontal axis.
*4) Pressing the [F1](SKIP) key enables to set next step without changing the last compensated value.
*5) Pressing the [F1](SKIP) key makes end of setting without changing compensation value.

17-16
 17 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

17.6 EDM Alignment Checking mode

This mode is used for check the optical axis and EDM axis. For more information about the checking,
see Section 17.2.1 “Checking the optical axis of EDM and theodolite”.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 While pressing the [F1] key, turn power switch ON. [F1] ADJUSTMENT MODE 1/2
+ F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
Power ON F2:INST. CONSTANT
F3:V0 AXIS P↓
2 Press the [F4] key. [F4] ADJUSTMENT MODE 2/2
F1:EDM CHECK
F2:FRQ CHECK MODE
P↓
3 Press the [F1] key. [F1] V: 90° 10'10"
EDM checking mode will display. HR: 20° 00'20"
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
EXIT NP/P HOLD

17.7 Reference frequency check mode

The beam modulated by the reference frequency of EDM is emitted continuously.
This mode is used for frequency test mainly.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 While pressing the [F1] key, turn power switch ON. [F1] ADJUSTMENT MODE 1/2
+ F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
POWER F2:INST. CONSTANT
ON F3:V0 AXIS P↓
2 Press the [F4](P↓) key to get the function as in [F4] ADJUSTMENT MODE 2/2
page 2. F1:EDM CHECK
F2:FRQ CHECK MODE
P↓
3 Press the [F2](FRQ CHECK MODE) key. [F2] FRQ CHECK MODE

EXIT
4 Press the [F1](EXIT) key. [F1] ADJUSTMENT MODE 2/2
The display will return to Adjustment mode menu F1:EDM CHECK
2/2.
F2:FRQ CHECK MODE
P↓

17-17
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

18 TOP FIELD MODE

18.1 MAIN MENU (Major Functions)
MENU 1/2 1.JOB [ ] 1.JOB•••
F1:TOP FIELD [F1] 2.SETTING [F1] Performs process
F2:ILLUMINATION 3.GO TO WORK related to JOB
F3:PARAMETERS1 P↓ [1] [2] [3] ↓ management

2.SETTING•••
[F2] Configures setting
for distance unit
and mode
[F4]

3.GO TO WORK•••
[F3] Performs occupied
point setting and
LAYOUT process

4.DATA MANAGER 4.DATA MANAGER•••

[F1] Performs coordinate
data reference and
[4] ↑ addition processing

18.2 JOB
Note: Note: When a job is created, a measurement/coordinates data file with the same job name
will be created in the internal memory. If there is another file with the same name, the
existing data file will be used for the job.

18.2.1To Create New Job

Operating procedure Operation Display
1 Select [F1] (TOP FIELD) from the menu. [MENU] 1.JOB [ ]
[F1] 2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

2 Select [F1] (JOB). [F1] 1.OPEN JOB FILE

2.CREATE NEW JOB
3.NO JOB FILE
[1] [2] [3] ↓

3 Select [F2] (CREATE NEW JOB). [F2] ENTER JOB FILE

[_ ]

ALP CLR
4 Enter job name. Enter job ENTER JOB FILE
name [JOB1_ ]
z 10 letters maximum
ALP CLR
5 Press [ENT] key to create a new job. [ENT] 1.JOB [JOB1 ]
2.SETTING
z If there is another job with the same name, the
3.GO TO WORK
existing job will be selected.
[1] [2] [3] ↓
z A maximum of 15 job files can be registered.

18-1
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

18.2.2To Select Existing Job

Operating procedure Operation Display
1 Select [F1] (TOP FIELD) from the menu. [MENU] 1.JOB [ ]
[F1] 2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

2 Select [F1] (JOB). [F1] 1.OPEN JOB FILE

2.CREATE NEW JOB
3.NO JOB FILE
[1] [2] [3] ↓

3 Select [F1] (OPEN JOB FILE). [F1] SELECT JOB FILE

[_ ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR
4 Select an existing job name with [F1] or [F2] [F1] or [F2] SELECT JOB FILE
(Arrow) key, or enter a job name. [JOB1_ ]
Enter job
name ↑ ↓ ALP CLR
5 Press [ENT] key to select job. [ENT] 1.JOB [JOB1 ]
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

z When the job is selected, the job name will be displayed at the top right of TOP FIELD of the main
menu.
1.JOB [JOB1 ]
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

18.2.3To Delete Job

Operating procedure Operation Display
1 Select [F1] (TOP FIELD) from the menu. [MENU] 1.JOB [ ]
[F1] 2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

2 Select [F1] (JOB). [F1], [F4] 4.DELETE JOB FILE

3 Select [F4] (↓) to move to the second page of the
JOB menu.
[4] ↓

4 Select [F1] (DELETE JOB FILE). [F1] SELECT JOB TO DEL

[_ ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR

18-2
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

5 Select an existing job name with [F1] or [F2] Enter/ SELECT JOB TO DEL
(Arrow) key, or enter a job name. Select job [JOB1_ ]
name
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
6 Press [ENT] key. [ENT] SELECT JOB TO DEL
[JOB1_ ]

>OK ? [YES][NO]
7 Pressing [F3] (YES) key will delete the job file. [F3] 4.DELETE JOB FILE

[4] ↓

18.2.4When Job is not to be Used

Job selection can be canceled if the job is not to be used and coordinate data is not to be recorded.

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 Select [F1] (TOP FIELD) from the menu. [MENU] 1.JOB [JOB1 ]
[F1] 2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

2 Select [F1] (JOB). [F1] 1.OPEN JOB FILE

2.CREATE NEW JOB
3.NO JOB FILE
[1] [2] [3] ↓

3 Job selection will be cancelled when [F3] (NO JOB [F3]

FILE) is selected.
<SET!>

18.3 SETTING
Operating procedure Operation Display
1 Select [F1] (TOP FIELD) from the menu. [MENU] 1.JOB [ ]
[F1] 2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

2 Select [F2] (SETTING). [F2] DIST UNITS :FT-10

COORDINATES :XYZ
EDM MODE :FINE
OK EDIT
3 To change the setting, select [F2] (EDIT). [F2] 1.US FEET-10THE
2.US FEET-INCHES
z To not change the setting, select [F1] (OK).
3.METERS
[1] [2] [3]

18-3
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

4 Select [F1] to [F3] to set the unit of distance. Select 1.N,E,Z

[F1]~[F3] 2.E,N,Z
[F1](US FEET-10THE): Display in feet
3.X,Y,Z
[F2](US FEET-INCHES): Display in feet and inches
[F3](METERS): Display in meters
[1] [2] [3]

5 Select [F1] to [F3] to set the display sequence of Select 1.FINE

coordinates. [F1]~[F3] 2.CRS-1mm
3.CRS-10mm
[F1](N,E,Z): Display N, E, Z
[F2](E,N,Z): Display E, N, Z
[1] [2] [3]
[F3](X,Y,Z): Display X, Y, Z
6 Select [F1]~[F3] to set the distance measurement Select DIST UNITS :METERS
mode. [F1]~[F3] COORDINATES :NEZ
EDM MODE :CRS-10
[F1](FINE): FINE mode
[F2](CRS-1mm): COARSE mode (Rounding in the
OK EDIT
unit of 1mm)
[F3](CRS-10mm): COARSE mode (Rounding in
the unit of 10mm)
7 Press [F1] (OK) to set. [OK] 1.JOB [ ]
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3] ↓

18.4 GO TO WORK
The following operations are performed with GO TO WORK.
1) Setting of occupied point and backsight ••••••INST SETUP
2) Layout ••••••LAYOUT
3) Ordinary measuring and coordinate saving ••••••TOPO

1.JOB [JOB1 ] 1.INST SETUP

2.SETTING [F3] 2.LAYOUT
3.GO TO WORK 3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3] ↓ [1] [2] [3]

18.4.1To Set Occupied Point and Backsight

To set occupied point
z Selecting from existing coordinate data

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F1] (INST SETUP). [F1] 1.SELECT INST PT
2.CREATE INST PT
3.MEAS KNWN PTS
[1] [2] [3]
2 Select [F1] (SELECT INST PT). [F1] ENTER INST PT
PT#: [ ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR

18-4
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

3 Select an existing coordinate point with [F1] or [F2] Enter/ ENTER INST PT
(Arrow) key, or directly enter a coordinate point. Select PT# PT#: [OCC-PT ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR
4 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=0.000_ m
CLR
5 Enter an instrument height. Enter ENTER INST HT
instrument INST HT
height =1.500_ m
CLR
6 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] 1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
z Then, the procedure will move onto backsight
3.BS DIRECTION
setting.
[1] [2] [3]

z Setting by entering the coordinate data of a occupied point directly

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F1] (INST SETUP). [F1] 1.SELECT INST PT
2.CREATE INST PT
3.MEAS KNWN PTS
[1] [2] [3]
2 Select [F2] (CREATE INST PT). [F2] ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#: [_ ]
DESC: [ ]
ALP CLR

3 Enter the coordinate point of a occupied point and Enter PT#, ENTER NEW POINT:
its description. Enter PT#: [OCC ]
DESC DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR
4 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] N [ ]
E [ ]
Z [ ]
ALP CLR
5 Enter occupied point coordinates (N, E, Z). Enter occu- N [0.000 ]
pied point E [0.000 ]
coordinate Z [0.000 ]
ALP CLR
6 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=0.000_ m
CLR

18-5
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

7 Enter an instrument height. Enter ENTER INST HT

instrument INST HT
height =1.500_ m
CLR
8 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] 1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
z Then, the procedure will move onto backsight
3.BS DIRECTION
setting.
[1] [2] [3]

z Seeking an occupied point from existing coordinate data

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F1] (INST SETUP). [F1] 1.SELECT INST PT
2.CREATE INST PT
3.MEAS KNWN PTS
[1] [2] [3]
2 Select [F3] (MEAS KNWN PTS). [F3] ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=0.000_ m
CLR

3 Enter an instrument height. Enter ENTER INST HT

instrument INST HT
height =1.500_ m
CLR
4 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER # REF PTS
# REF PTS: =

CLR
5 Enter point number to collimate. Enter colli- ENTER # REF PTS
mate point # REF PTS: = 2
z Collimate point number: 2 to 7 points number
CLR
6 Set with [ENT]. [ENT] ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=0.000_ m
CLR
7 Enter a reflector height. Enter ENTER TARGET HT
reflector HT OF ROD
height =1.500_ m
CLR
8 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER TARGET PT# 1/2
PT#: [_ ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR

18-6
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

9 Select the coordinate point of a collimate point Enter/ ENTER TARGET PT# 1/2
with [F1] or [F2] (Arrow) key, or enter the Select PT# PT#: [PT-01_ ]
coordinate point directly. *1)
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
10 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] MEAS POINT 1/2
PT#: [PT-01 ]
HD: m
MSR CHK HR
11 Collimate prism and press [F1] (MSR) key. [F1] MEAS POINT 1/2
Begin measurement. PT#: [PT-01 ]
HD* <<< m
>Measuring...
12 When the prism measurement is completed, ENTER TARGET PT# 2/2
perform measurement for the next collimate point. PT#: [PT-01_ ]
z Follow the same procedure.
↑ ↓ ALP CLR

MEAS POINT 2/2

PT#: [PT-01 ]
HD* <<< m
>Measuring...
After the prism is measured the set number of
times, the occupied point coordinates will be dN: 0000.00 mm
calculated and the standard deviation will be dE: 0000.00 mm
displayed. dZ: 0000.00 mm
OK NO
13 Press [F1] (OK). [F1] ENTER NEW POINT:
The screen for inputting the coordinate point of an PT#: [_ ]
occupied point and its description will be
DESC: [ ]
displayed.
ALP CLR
14 Enter the coordinate point of an occupied point Enter PT#, ENTER NEW POINT:
and its description. Enter PT#: [OCC ]
DESC DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR
15 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] POINT X SET!
ORIENTATION SET!

OK NEZ
16 When you press [F1] (OK), an occupied point and [F1] 1.INST SETUP
backsight will be set and the procedure will be 2.LAYOUT
completed.
3.TOPO
z The backsight is set up based on the previously
[1] [2] [3]
collimated prism position. Therefore, always press
[OK] under the condition in which the previous
prism backsight collimated.

18-7
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

z Checking collimate point coordinates during prism collimation

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 To check the collimate point coordinates during [F2] MEAS POINT 1/2
prism collimation, select [F2] (CHK) key. PT#: [PT-01 ]

MSR CHK HR

N [ 10.000 ]
E [ 20.000 ]
Z [ 0.000 ]
ENTER

z Checking prism height during prism collimation

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 To check the prism height during prism collimation, [F3] MEAS POINT 1/2
select [F3] (HR) key. PT#: [PT-01 ]

MSR CHK HR

ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=1.500_ m
CLR

z Checking occupied point coordinates during occupied point/backsight setting

Operating procedure Operation Display

1 To check the occupied point coordinates during [F2] POINT X SET!
occupied point/backsight setting, select [F2] (NEZ) ORIENTATION SET!
key.
OK NEZ

N [ 0.000 ]
E [ 0.000 ]
Z [ 0.000 ]
ENTER

To set backsight
After completing the occupied point setting, the display for backsight setting will be displayed.
z Setting from existing coordinate data

Operating procedure Operation Display

z When the occupied point setting is completed, 1.SELECT BS PT
this menu screen will be displayed.
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F1] (SELECT BS PT). [F1] ENTER BS POINT
PT#: [ ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR

18-8
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

2 Select an existing coordinate point with [F1] or [F2] Enter/ ENTER BS POINT
(Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point directly. Select PT# PT#: [BS-PT_ ]

↑ ↓ ALP CLR

3 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER BS HEIGHT

BS HT
=0.000_ m
CLR
4 Enter a reflector height. Enter ENTER BS HEIGHT
reflector BS HT
height =1.500_ m
CLR
5 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] SIGHT BS TARGET
1.MEAS ANG+DIST
2.MEAS ANG ONLY

6 Measure collimate point to set up backsight. BS DIST CHECK

To measuring distance, and to seek deviation with dDIST
missing line distance calculated from coordinate
= m
data, select [F1] (MEAS ANG + DIST); and to set
up only the angle, select [F2] (MEAS ANG ONLY).
MSR OK

z For example, select [F1]

7 Select [F1] (MSR). The distance to collimate point [F1] BS DIST CHECK
will be measured and the difference to the dDIST
distance sought from coordinate data will be
= 0.000 m
displayed.
MSR OK
8 Pressing [F4] (OK) will complete the backsight [F4] 1.INST SETUP
setting. 2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]

z Setting by entering the coordinate data of a collimate point directly

Operating procedure Operation Display

z After the occupied point setting is completed, 1.SELECT BS PT
this menu will be displayed.
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F2] (CREATE BS PT). [F2] 1.INPUT PT
2.MEAS PT

[1] [2]
2 Select [F1] (INPUT PT). [F1] ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#: [_ ]
DESC: [ ]
ALP CLR

18-9
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

3 Enter the coordinate point of a collimate point and Enter PT #, ENTER NEW POINT:
its description. Enter PT#: [BS ]
DESC DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR
4 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] N [ ]
E [ ]
Z [ ]
ALP CLR
5 Enter collimate point coordinates (N, E, Z). Enter colli- N [10.000 ]
mate point E [10.000 ]
coordinate Z [0.000 ]
ALP CLR
6 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=0.000_ m
CLR
7 Enter a reflector height. Enter ENTER BS HEIGHT
reflector BS HT
height =1.500_ m
CLR
8 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] SIGHT BS TARGET
1.MEAS ANG+DIST
2.MEAS ANG ONLY

9 From here to the backsight setting, follow the

same procedure to set backsight from existing
coordinate data.

z Using an existing horizontal angle and saving the coordinate data of the collimate point

Operating procedure Operation Display

z After the occupied point setting is completed, 1.SELECT BS PT
this menu will be displayed.
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F2] (CREATE BS PT). [F2] 1.INPUT PT
2.MEAS PT

[1] [2]
2 Select [F2] (MEAS PT). [F2] ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#: [_ ]
DESC: [ ]
ALP CLR

3 Enter the coordinate point of a collimate point and Enter PT #, ENTER NEW POINT:
its description to record. Enter PT#: [BS ]
DESC DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR

18-10
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

4 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER BS HEIGHT

BS HT
=0.000_ m
CLR
5 Enter a reflector height. Enter ENTER BS HEIGHT
reflector BS HT
height =1.500_ m
CLR
6 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] SIGHT BS TARGET

HD: m
MSR
7 Collimate the reflector and press [F1] (MSR) key [F1] SIGHT BS TARGET
to begin measurement.
HD* <<< m
>Measuring...
8 After measuring the reflector, record the 1.INST SETUP
coordinate data to complete the setting. 2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]

z Setting by entering backsight directly

Operating procedure Operation Display

z After the occupied point setting is completed, 1.SELECT BS PT
this menu will be displayed.
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F3] (BS DIRECTION). [F3] ENTER BS ANGLE
BS AN[_ ]
DDD.MMSS
0SET CLR
2 Enter a backsight directly. Enter ENTER BS ANGLE
Pressing [F1] (0SET) will enter 0. backsight BS AN[0.0000_ ]
DDD.MMSS
0SET CLR
3 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] SIGHT BS TARGET

>OK ? [YES][NO]
4 Collimate the reflector and press [F3] (YES). [F3] 1.INST SETUP
Set backsight to end. 2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]

18-11
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

18.4.2To Layout
Operating procedure Operation Display

1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F2] (LAYOUT). [F2] ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=0.000_ m
CLR
2 Enter a reflector height. Enter ENTER TARGET HT
reflector HT OF ROD
height =1.500_ m
CLR
3 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER LAYOUT POINT#
PT#: [_ ]
DESC: [ ]
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
4 Select a coordinate point to layout with [F1] or [F2] Enter/ ENTER LAYOUT POINT#
(Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point directly. Select PT# PT#: [P01_ ]
DESC: [ ]
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
5 Set with [ENT] key. The data displayed will be [ENT] dHA: 45°00'00"
Line 1: Horizontal angle to layout point IN : m
(Difference)
CUT: m
Line 2: Cross directional distance to layout point
(Difference)
MSR R/L REC NEXT
Line 3: Vertical distance to layout point
(Difference)
6 Pressing [F1] (MSR) will perform distance [F1] dHA: 45°00'00"
measurement and it will also display the distance IN : 2.500 m
difference.
CUT: 0.010 m
z Data is updated each time (MSR) is performed.
MSR R/L REC NEXT

7 Pressing [F2] (R/L) key will display distance [F2] R : 1.250 m

difference in the horizontal direction, instead of the IN : 2.500 m
difference in the horizontal angle.
CUT: 0.010 m
Line 1: Horizontal distance to layout point
(Difference)
MSR NEZ REC NEXT
Line 2: Cross directional distance to layout point
(Difference)
Line 3: Vertical distance to layout point
(Difference)

18-12
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

8 Pressing [F2] (NEZ) key will display coordinate [F2] N : 1.250 m

data. E : 2.500 m
Line 1: N coordinate (E coordinate)
Z : 0.010 m
Line 2: E coordinate (N coordinate)
Line 3: Z coordinate
MSR dHA REC NEXT
z Pressing [F2] (dHA) will return to the angle
difference display.
9 Press [F3] (REC) key to record the data and move [F3] or [F4] ENTER LAYOUT POINT#
to layout for the next point, and press [F4] (NEXT) PT#: [P02_ ]
key to move to layout for the next point without
DESC: [ ]
saving the data.
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
The number in the coordinate point will
automatically be incremented.

18.4.3To Conduct Ordinary Measurement and to Record Coordinates

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F3] (TOPO). [F3] PT#: [ ]
DESC: [ ]
HT ROD: 1.500 m
HR ALP CLR
2 Enter the coordinate point and its description to Enter PT#, PT#: [P01 ]
record. * 1) Enter DESC: [POINT ]
DESC HT ROD: 1.500 m
HR ALP CLR
3 Set with [ENT] key. * 2) [ENT] PT#: [P01 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
HT ROD: 1.500 m
FAST EDIT HR MSR
4 To record the coordinate data without checking [F1] PT#: [P01 ]
measured data, select [F1] (FAST) key. DESC: [POINT ]
HT ROD: 1.500 m
>Measuring...
5 The measured coordinate data will be recorded, Save data PT#: [P02 ]
and the number in the coordinate point will DESC: [POINT ]
automatically be incremented.
HT ROD: 1.500 m
FAST EDIT HR MSR
6 To record the coordinate data while checking [F4] VA: 90°00'00"
measured data, select [F4] (MSR) key. HA: 120°00'00"
HD: m
MSR SD NEZ REC
7 Measure with [F1] (MSR) key. [F1] VA: 60°00'00"
HA: 120°00'00"
HD: 10.000 m
MSR SD NEZ REC

18-13
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

8 Pressing [F2] (SD) key will switch the distance [F2] VA: 60°00'00"
display to the SD display. HA: 120°00'00"
HD: 11.547 m
MSR HD NEZ REC
9 Pressing [F3] (NEZ) key will switch to the [F3] N : -5.000 m
coordinate display. E : 8.660 m
Z : 5.774 m
MSR HD NEZ REC
10 Pressing [F3] (A/D) key will switch to the [F3] VA: 60°00'00"
previously measured angle/measured distance HA: 120°00'00"
display.
HD: 11.547 m
MSR HD NEZ REC
11 Pressing [F4] (REC) key will record the data. [F4] PT#: [P02 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
z Data to be recorded are recalculated from the
HT ROD: 1.500 m
currently displayed angle and horizontal distance
(angle offset function).
FAST EDIT HR MSR

To record the coordinate data of the collimate

point, record (REC) them without moving the angle
after measurement (MSR).

*1) To change the reflector height, select [F2] (HR) key to switch to the screen for reflector height input.

PT#: [P01 ] ENTER TARGET HT

DESC: [POINT ] [F2] HT OF ROD
HT ROD: 1.500 m =1.500_ m
HR ALP CLR CLR

*2) To edit a coordinate point and its description, select [F2] (EDIT) key to return to the editing mode.

PT#: [P01 ] PT#: [P01_ ]

DESC: [POINT ] [F2] DESC: [POINT ]
HT ROD: 1.500 m HT ROD: 1.500 m
FAST EDIT HR MSR HR ALP CLR

18-14
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

18.5 DATA MANAGER

The following operations can be performed with DATA MANAGER.
1) Adding coordinate data ••••••ADD POINT
2) Deleting coordinate data ••••••DELETE POINT
3) Viewing coordinate data ••••••VIEW POINT
4) Editing coordinate data ••••••EDIT POINT
5) Transferring coordinate data ••••••DATA TRANSFER

4.DATA MANAGER 1.ADD POINT

[F1] 2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[4] ↑ [1] [2] [3] ↓

[F4]
4.EDIT POINT
5.DATA TRANSFER

[4] [5] ↑

18.5.1To Add Coordinate Data To Add Coordinate Data

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3] ↓

Select [F1] (ADD POINT). [F1] 1.COORDINATES

Coordinates can be added through the following
2.REFLINE
procedure:
1. COORDINATES 3.TAPE
2. REFLINE [1] [2] [3]
3. TAPE

z Entering coordinates directly (COORDINATES)

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F1] (COORDINATES). [F1] ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#: [_ ]
DESC: [ ]
ALP CLR
2 Enter a coordinate point and its description. Enter PT#, ENTER NEW POINT:
Enter PT#: [P01 ]
DESC DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR
3 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] N [_ ]
E [ ]
Z [ ]
CLR

18-15
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

4 Enter N/E/Z coordinates. Enter NEZ N [0.000 ]

Coordinate E [0.000 ]
Data Z [0.000_ ]
CLR
5 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] PT#: [P01 ]
The coordinate point and the job name will be STORED!
displayed and the procedure will be completed.
JOB [JOB1 ]

1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]

z REFLINE
REF2

OFFSET

DISTANCE ADD POINT

REF1

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F2] (REFLINE). [F2] ENTER REF1
PT#: [_ ]
DESC:
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
2 To acquire coordinate data for reference "REF1," Enter/ ENTER REF1
select an existing coordinate point with [F1] or [F2] Select PT# PT#: [P01_ ]
(Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point directly.
DESC:
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
3 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER REF2
PT#: [_ ]
DESC:
↑ ↓ ALP CLR

18-16
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

4 Acquire coordinate data for Reference "REF2" in Enter/ ENTER REF2

the same manner. Select PT# PT#: [P02_ ]
DESC:
↑ ↓ ALP CLR

[ENT] ENTER DISTANCE

= _ m
CLR
5 Enter the distance (DISTANCE) from reference Enter ENTER DISTANCE
"REF1" to the direction of "REF2". DISTANCE
= 10.000_ m
CLR
6 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER OFFSET

L = _ m
LEFT RIGHT CLR
7 Enter the horizontal direction distance (OFFSET). Enter ENTER OFFSET
To select directions, press [F1] (LEFT) to move to OFFSET,
the left and [F2] (RIGHT) to the right. [F1] or [F2] R = 5.000_ m
LEFT RIGHT CLR
8 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] REF1 [P01 ]
The conditions for calculating coordinate data will REF2 [P02 ]
be displayed.
OK EDIT ↓

9 [F4] (↑/↓) will allow the switching of the "REF1/ [F4] DIS: 10.000 m
REF2" display and "DISTANCE/OFFSET" display. R : 5.000 m

OK EDIT ↑

10 Press [F1] (OK) to calculate coordinate data. [F1] ENTER NEW POINT:
After the coordinate data is calculated, the PT#: [_ ]
procedure will move onto coordinate point/
DESC: [ ]
description entries.
ALP CLR
z The procedures below will be the same as the
ones for entering coordinates directly Enter PT#, ENTER NEW POINT:
(COORDINATE). Enter PT#: [P03 ]
description DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR

[ENT] N [ 10.000 ]
E [ 5.000 ]
Z [ 0.000 ]
ENTER

18-17
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

z The calculated value will be displayed for the [ENT] PT#: [P03 ]
coordinate data. Set with [ENT] key.
STORED!
JOB [JOB 1 ]

1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]

z TAPE
END PT# OFFSET

ADD POINT

START PT#

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select [F3] (TAPE). [F3] ENTER START PT#
PT#: [_ ]
DESC:
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
2 In order to acquire coordinate data for reference Enter/ ENTER START PT#
"START" point, select an existing coordinate point Select PT# PT#: [P01_ ]
with [F1] or [F2] (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate
DESC:
point directly.
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
3 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER END PT#
PT#: [_ ]
DESC:
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
4 In order to acquire coordinate data for reference Enter/ ENTER END PT#
"END" point, select an existing coordinate point Select PT# PT#: [P02_ ]
with [F1] or [F2] (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate
DESC:
point directly.
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
5 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER FROM END PT#

L = _ m
LEFT RIGHT CLR

18-18
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

6 Enter the horizontal distance (OFFSET) from Enter ENTER FROM END PT#
"END" point. OFFSET,
To select directions, press [F1] (LEFT) to move to [F1] or [F2] R = 5.000_ m
the left and [F2] (RIGHT) to the right.
LEFT RIGHT CLR
7 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] START [P01 ]
The conditions for calculating coordinate data will END [P02 ]
be displayed.
R : 5.000 m
OK EDIT ↓

8 Press [F1] (OK) to calculate coordinate data. [F1] ENTER NEW POINT:
After the coordinate data is calculated, the PT#: [_ ]
procedure will move onto coordinate point/
DESC: [ ]
description entries.
ALP CLR
z The procedures below will be the same as the
ones for entering coordinates directly Enter PT#, ENTER NEW POINT:
(COORDINATE). Enter PT#: [P03 ]
DESC DESC: [POINT_ ]
ALP CLR

z The calculated value will be displayed for the [ENT] N [ 10.000 ]

coordinate data. Set with [ENT] key.
E [ 5.000 ]
Z [ 0.000 ]
ENTER

[ENT] PT#: [P03 ]

STORED!
JOB [JOB1 ]

1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]

18.5.2To Delete Coordinate Data

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3] ↓

1 Select [F2] (DELETE POINT). [F2] 1.DESIGN PT

2.MEASUREMENT PT

[1] [2]
2 Select the type of data to delete. [F1] or [F2] ENTER PT TO DEL
[F1] (DESIGN PT) PT#: [_ ]
•••••• Coordinate data entered directly and
DESC: [ ]
recorded for addition of coordinates
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
[F2] (MEASUREMENT PT)
•••••• Coordinate data observed and recorded
through layout, TOPO, etc.

18-19
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

3 Select a coordinate point to delete with [F1] or [F2] Enter/ ENTER PT TO DEL
(Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point directly. Select PT# PT#: [P01_ ]
DESC: [ ]
↑ ↓ ALP CLR
4 Set with [ENT] key. [ENT] ENTER PT TO DEL
PT#: [P01 ]
DESC: [ ]
>OK ? [YES][NO]
5 When deleting data, there will be a verification [F3]
procedure. Selecting [F3] (YES) here will delete POINT
the coordinate data selected.
DELETED!

1.DESIGN PT
2.MEASUREMENT PT

[1] [2]

18.5.3To View Coordinate Data

Operating procedure Operation Display

1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3] ↓

1 Select [F3] (VIEW POINT). [F3] 1.DESIGN PT

2.MEASUREMENT PT

[1] [2]
2 Select type of data to view. [F1] or [F2] DESIGN PT
[F1] (DESIGN PT) PT#: [P01 ]
•••••• Coordinate data entered directly and
DESC: [POINT ]
recorded for addition of coordinates
↑ ↓ NEZ
[F2] (MEASUREMENT PT)
•••••• Coordinate data observed and recorded
through layout, TOPO, etc.
3 Select a coordinate point to view with [F1] or [F2] Enter/ DESIGN PT
(Arrow) key. Select PT# PT#: [P99 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
↑ ↓ NEZ
4 To check the coordinate data, press [F4] (NEZ). [F4] N [ 0.000 ]
E [ 0.000 ]
Z [ 0.000 ]
↑ ↓ PT#
5 Pressing [F4] (PT#) will return to the coordinate [F4] DESIGN PT
point display. PT#: [P99 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
↑ ↓ NEZ

18-20
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

18.5.4To Edit Coordinate Data

Operating procedure Operation Display
z Only entered coordinate data (design data) can 4.EDIT POINT
be edited.
5.DATA TRANSFER

[4] [5] ↑

1 Select [F1] (EDIT POINT). [F1] DESIGN PT

PT#: [P01 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
↑ ↓ EDIT NEZ
2 Select a coordinate point to edit with [F1] or [F2] [F1] or [F2] DESIGN PT
(Arrow) key. PT#: [P99 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
↑ ↓ EDIT NEZ
3 Switch to the editing mode by pressing [F3] (Edit) [F3] DESIGN PT
key. PT#: [P99_ ]
DESC: [POINT ]
ALP CLR
4 After editing the coordinate point and its Edit data DESIGN PT
description, set with [ENT] key. [ENT] PT#: [PT-99 ]
DESC: [POINT ]
↑ ↓ EDIT NEZ
z Coordinate data can be edited with the editing N [ 0.000 ]
mode in the same manner.
E [ 0.000 ]
Z [ 0.000 ]
↑ ↓ EDIT PT#

[F3] N [0.000_ ]
E [0.000 ]
Z [0.000 ]
CLR

18-21
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

18.5.5To Transfer Coordinate Data

Operating procedure Operation Display

4.EDIT POINT
5.DATA TRANSFER

[4] [5] ↑

1 Select [F2] (DATA TRANSFER). [F2] DATA TRANSFER

Data transfer corresponds to the following two F1:GTS FORMAT
types of transmission formats:
F2:SSS FORMAT
F1: GTS FORMAT
F2: SSS FORMAT

z Setting Transmission Protocol

Operating procedure Operation Display

z Always check transmission protocol before DATA TRANSFER
performing data transfer.
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT

1 Select the transmission format to use. [F1] or [F2] DATA TRANSFER

F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
2 Select [F3] (COMM. PARAMETERS) [F3] COMM. PARAMETERS
F1:BAUD RATE
F2:CHAR./PARITY
F3:STOP BITS

Set items for transmission protocol are as follows according to the format.

z GTS FORMAT

Item Selecting Item Contents

[ACK/NAK], Setting Protocol

Protocol
[ONE WAY] [ACK/NAK] or [ONE WAY] communication

1200, 2400, 4800, Setting transfer speed

Baud rate
9600, 19200, 38400 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud

[7/EVEN], [7/ODD], Setting data length and parity.

Char. / Parity
[8/NON] [7bit, even], [7bit, odd], [8bit,none]

Stop Bits 1, 2 Setting Stop 1 bit or 2bits

z SSS FORMAT

Item Selecting Item Contents

1200, 2400, 4800, Setting transfer speed

Baud rate
9600, 19200, 38400 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud

[7/EVEN], [7/ODD], Setting data length and parity.

Char. / Parity
[8/NON] [7bit, even], [7bit, odd], [8bit,none]

Stop Bits 1, 2 Setting Stop 1 bit or 2bits

18-22
 18 TOP FIELD MODE

z Receiving coordinate data

Operating procedure Operation Display

DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT

1 Select the transmission format used for receiving [F1] or [F2] DATA TRANSFER
data. F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F1: GTS FORMAT
F2: SSS FORMAT
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS

2 Select [F2] (LOAD DATA). [F2] LOAD COORD. DATA

>OK ?
--- --- [YES][NO]
3 Press [F3] (YES) to begin the coordinate data [F3] LOAD COORD. DATA
receiving process. *
< Loading Data ! >
STOP

z Sending coordinate data

Operating procedure Operation Display

DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT

1 Select the transmission format used for receiving [F1] or [F2] DATA TRANSFER
data. F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F1: GTS FORMAT
F2: SSS FORMAT
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS

2 Select [F1] (SEND DATA). [F1] SEND COORD. DATA

>OK ?
--- --- [YES][NO]
3 Press [F3] (YES) to begin the coordinate data [F3] SEND COORD. DATA
sending process. *
< Sending Data ! >
STOP

18-23
 19 PRECAUTIONS

19 PRECAUTIONS
1) For transportation, hold by the handle or yoke of the instrument. Never hold by the lens barrel as it
can affect the fixing bracket inside and reduce the accuracy of the instrument.

2) Never expose the instrument without a filter to direct sunlight. It may damage the components
inside the instrument.

3) Never leave the instrument unprotected in high temperature. The temperature inside instrument
may easily reach up to 70°C or above and will reduce the service life.

4) The instrument should be stored in the room temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 60°C.

5) When a high degree of precision is required for measurement, provide shade against direct sunlight
for the instrument and tripod.

6) Any sudden change of temperature to the instrument or prism may result in a reduction of
measuring distance range, i.e. when taking the instrument out from a heated vehicle.

7) When opening the carrying case and taking out the instrument, place the case horizontally, then
open the case.

8) When returning the instrument to its case, be sure to match the white positioning marks provided
with the case and fit it correctly into the concave shape inside the case.

9) For transportation, provide dampening or a cushion appropriately to avoid sudden shock or

vibration.

10) For cleaning the instrument after use, remove dust using a cleaning brush, then wipe off with a
cloth.

11) For cleaning the lens surface, use a cleaning brush to remove the dust, then use a clean lintless
cotton cloth. Moisten it with alcohol (or mixture with ether ) to wipe gently in a rotational motion from
the center out.

12) Even if any abnormality occurs, never attempt to disassemble or lubricate the instrument yourself.
Always consult with TOPCON or your dealer.

13) To remove the dust on the case, never use thinner or benzine. Use a clean cloth moistened with
neutral detergent.

14) Check each part of the tripod after extended use. Parts (screws or clamps) may work themselves
free.

19-1
 20 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES

20 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES

Power cord PC-5 (For AC-6) Power cord PC-6 (For AC-6)
z Cord length: 2m approx. z Cord length: 2m approx.

Trough compass, Model 6 Solar reticle, Model 6

Shock proof construction. No clamp is necessary A reticle designed for collimation of the sun.
when carrying the instrument. Can be used together with Solar Filter.

Diagonal eyepiece, Model 10 Solar filter, Model 6

Observation in an easy posture will be provided up to A filter designed exclusively for direct collimation of
the zenith position. the sun.
Solar filter of flap-up type.

Back pack Model 2

Convenient for use in mountainous terrain.

20-1
 20 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES

Prism unit case, Model 6 Prism unit case, Model 3

Fixed 9 prisms unit or tilting 3 prisms unit can be This is the plastic case to store and carry various sets
stored in this case. Especially, this is a very easy case of prisms.
to carry. Soft material is used. The case covers one of the following prism sets:
z External dimensions: 1) Tilt single prism set
250(L)×120(W)×400(H) mm 2) Tilt single prism set with a target plate
z Weight:0.5kg 3) Fixed triple prism unit
4) Fixed triple prism unit with a target plate
Prism unit case, Model 5 z External dimensions:
1 prisms unit or fixed 3 prisms unit can be stored in 427(L)×254(W)×242(H) mm
this case. Especially, this is a very easy case to carry. z Weight:3.1kg
Soft material is used.
z External dimensions:
200(L)×200(W)×350(H) mm
z Weight:0.5kg

Interface cable F-24 Auto Converter AC-6

Cable for communicating an external instrument and z Input voltage : DC12V
GPT-3200N/NW by the serial signal connector. z Output voltage : DC 8.4V±5%
z Current rating : 3A
z Connection cable length : Approx. 3m
z External dimensions
100(L) x 50(W) x 52(H) mm
z Weight : Approx. 0.3kg

20-2
 20 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES

Mini prism Optical plummet tribrach

The mini prism (25.4mm) is made from precision This is detachable tribrach having built-in optical
ground glass and mounted in high impact plastic plummet telescope. (Compatible with Wild)
housings.
z The mini has the unique capability of being
positioned either at a "0" or "–30" with the same
prism

Prism sets
See the description on 22 “PRISM SYSTEM”.

Aluminum extension leg tripod, Type E Wide-frame extension leg tripod, Type E (Wood)
z Flat head 5/8" × 11 threads with adjustable legs. z Flat head 5/8" × 11 threads with adjustable legs.

20-3
 21 BATTERY SYSTEM

21 BATTERY SYSTEM
z In case of On-board battery

BT-52QA

GPT-3200N/NW series

z In case of External power source

Cord External power source

External 12V battery

PC-5, PC-6

GPT-3200N/NW series AC-6

z Charging

Charging time Charger Quick

100-240V~
BC-27M In North America, use only
120V ~.
Use an AC cable compatible
Approx. 1.8h
with the power supply
voltage in use.

BT-52QA

Note:
Use only recommended batteries or external power source.
Use of batteries or an external power source not recommended by us
may result in equipment failure.

21-1
 22 PRISM SYSTEM

22 PRISM SYSTEM
Arrangement according to your needs is possible.

Target pole-2
(not used with 9 prisms)

Prism-2

Tilting prism Tilting prism Single prism Triple prism Tilting triple
holder-2 holder-3 holder-2 holder-2 prism holder-1 9 prism
with target holder-2
plate-2

Tribrach Tribrach
adaptor-2 adaptor-S2
Pole adaptor- A

Pole adaptor- F2 Tribrach Optical plummet tribrach

It is possible to change the combination according purpose.

Tilt single prism unit Fixed 3 prisms unit Fixed 9 prisms unit

Tripod

Use the above prisms after setting them at the same height as the instruments. To adjust the height of
prism set, change the position of 4 fixing screws.

22-1
 23 ERROR DISPLAYS

23 ERROR DISPLAYS
Error code Description Countermeasures

When area calculating, there are less Confirm the file data and calculate
3 points
than 3 points coordinate data in again.
required
selected file.

CALC Calculation is impossible from the Confirm the input data.

ERROR data input.

DELETE When deleting coordinate data, it can not Confirm the data and delete again.
ERROR be done successful.

Displayed when REM measurement Operate in the range out of ± 6° from the
E35 carried out to the range from zenith or zenith or nadir.
nadir ±6°.

Any abnormality occurs with EDM (distance Repair is required.

E60’s
measuring system).

Displayed when vertical angle 0 position is Confirm the procedure and readjust.
E71
set with incorrect procedure.

Displayed when Vertical angle -position is Repair is required.

E72
adjusted in wrong position.

The instrument was not leveled when Vertical Level the instrument then carry the
E73
angle 0-position is adjusted. adjustment work.

Mainly at the time data transmission Confirm operation procedure is correct or the
E80’s between GPT-3200N/NW series and external connection cables are correct.
instrument.

Abnormality in internal memory Repair is required.

E90’s
system.

FILE The same file name exists. Use another file name.
EXISTS

FULL When making a file, 30 files already exist. If necessary, send or delete files.
FILES

FAILED Initializing can not be done successful. Confirm initializing data and try to
INITIALIZE initialize again.

LIMIT Limit of input data exceeded. Input again.

OVER

MEMORY Any abnormality occurs with internal Initialize the internal memory.
ERROR memory.

MEMORY Shortage of capacity of the internal Download data from internal memory
POOR memory. to PC.

The data is not found in the search Confirm the data and search again.
NO DATA
mode

NO FILE There is no file in internal memory. If necessary, make files.

FILE NOT When using a file, no file is selected. Confirm the file and select a file.
SELECTED

P1-P2 When in point to line measurement, the The horizontal distance between first
distance horizontal distance between first point and point and second point must be more
too short second point is within 1m. than 1m.

23-1
 23 ERROR DISPLAYS

CIRCULAR Known points and occupied point are on the

Take the different point.
ERROR same circle at the resection mode.

Same new point name is already memorized Confirm the new point name and input
PT# EXIST
in the memory. again.

PT# DOES When you enter incorrect name or PT# does Enter the correct name or enter point in the
NOT EXIST not exist in the internal memory. internal memory.

RANGE When setting a new point, calculation is Measure again.

ERROR impossible from the measured data.

Instrument tilts over more than Level the instrument properly.

Tilt Over
3 minutes.

V ANGLE
ERROR

H ANGLE If this error code continues to display, repair

Abnormality in angle measuring system.
ERROR is required.
VH ANGLE
ERROR

z If error still persist after attempting to clear them, contact your local Topcon dealer or Topcon head
office.

23-2
 24 REGULATIONS

24 REGULATIONS
Region/ Directives/
Labels/Declarations
Country Regulations

EMC NOTICE

EU EMC-Class A

R&TTE Directive
NON-PRISM TOTAL STATION GPT-3200NW
Hereby, TOPCON CORP., declares that the above-mentioned equipment is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.

EU R&TTE-Class 1 Please inquire below if you wish to receive a copy of Topcon's Declaration of
Conformity.

Topcon Europe Positioning B.V.

Essebaan 11, 2908 LJ Capelle a/d IJssel, The Netherlands
Tel:+31-10-4585077 Fax:+31-10-2844949
http://www.topcon-positioning.eu/index.asp

Australia C-Tick
The compliance label indicates that the product complies with the applicable
standard and establishes a traceable link between the equipment and the
manufacturer, importer or their agent responsible for compliance and for placing
it on the Australian market.

24-1
 24 REGULATIONS

Region/ Directives/
Labels/Declarations
Country Regulations

FCC Compliance
WARNING:
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.

NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-ference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.
U.S.A. FCC-ClassA
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with
at least 20cm and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremeties: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: GPT-3200NW
Trade Name: TOPCON CORPORATION
Manufacturer
Name: TOPCON CORPORATION
Address: 75-1, Hasunuma-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo, 174-8580 JAPAN
Country: JAPAN

U.S.A. Representative
Responsible party: TOPCON POSITIONING SYSTEMS,INC.
Address: 7400 National Drive Livermore, CA94551, U.S.A
Telephone number: 925-245-8300

z If error still persist after attempting to clear them, contact your local Topcon dealer or Topcon head
office.

24-2
 25 SPECIFICATIONS

25 SPECIFICATIONS
Telescope
Length : 150mm
Objective lens : 45mm (EDM 50mm)
Magnification : 30×
Image : Erect
Field of view : 1°30'
Resolving power : 2.8"
Minimum focus : 1.3m
Reticle illumination : Provided

Distance measurement
Measurement range
Non-prism mode

Target Measurement range

Kodak gray card

1.5m to 350 m (5 ft to 1148 ft)
(White surface) *1)

Kodak gray card

1.5m to 175 m (5 ft to 574 ft)
(Gray surface) *2)

Atmospheric condition:
Visibility about 20km (12.5miles), in low light condition and without sun glare on target
1*) When using Kodak gray card (white surface, reflection rate 90%)
2*) When using Kodak gray card (gray surface, reflection rate 18%)

Prism mode

Prism Measurement range

Mini prism 1,000m(3,280ft)

1 prism 3,000m(9,900ft)

Atmospheric condition:
Slight haze with visibility about 20km (12.5miles) moderate sunlight with
light heat shimmer.

Measurement accuracy / Least Count in Measurement/Measurement Time

z Prism mode D:Measuring distance(mm)

Measurement mode Measurement accuracy Least Count Measurement

in Measurement Time *3)

0.2mm 1.5 sec.

0.2mm mode
(0.001ft) (Initial 3 sec.)
± (2mm +2ppm × D)
Fine
m.s.e.
1mm mode 1mm 1.1 sec.
(0.005ft) (Initial 2.5 sec.)

1mm
1mm mode
(0.005ft)
± (7mm +2ppm × D) 0.8 sec.
Coarse
m.s.e. (Initial 2.5 sec.)
10mm
10mm mode
(0.02ft)

± (10mm +2ppm × D) 10mm 0.5 sec.

Tracking
m.s.e. (0.02ft) (Initial 2.5 sec.)

25-1
 25 SPECIFICATIONS

z Non-prism mode (Diffusing Surface) D:Measuring distance(mm)

Least Count Measurement

Measurement mode Measurement accuracy*4) in Measurement Time*3)*4)*5)

0.2mm 2.6 sec.

0.2mm mode
(0.001ft) (Initial 3.5 sec.)
Fine ± (3mm+2ppm × D) m.s.e.
1mm mode 1mm 1.7 sec.
(0.005ft) (Initial 3 sec.)

1mm
1mm mode
(0.005ft)
1 sec.
Coarse ± (10mm) m.s.e.
(Initial 2 sec.)
10mm mode 10mm
(0.02ft)

10mm 0.4 sec.

Tracking ± (10mm) m.s.e.
(0.02ft) (Initial 2 sec.)

*3) The initial time will be different by a condition.

*4) When using Kodak gray card (white surface, reflection rate 90%)
*5) However, when the measurement distance is more than 100 m, or when the reflectance of the
measured surface is low, measurement time will become longer.

Laser class for distance measurement : Class 1M(IEC Publication 60825-1)

: Class I(FDA/BHR 21 CFR 1040)
Measurement Display : 12 digits : max. display 99999999.9999
Atmospheric Correction Range : –999.9 ppm to +999.9 ppm, in 0.1 ppm increments
Prism Constant Correction Range : –99.9 mm to +99.9 mm, in 0.1 mm increments
Coefficient Factor : Meter / Feet
International feet 1meter = 3.2808398501 ft.
US SURVEY feet 1meter = 3.2808333333 ft.

Electronic Angle Measurement

Method : Absolute reading
Detecting system
Horizontal angle
GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW : 2 sides
GPT-3207N/NW : 1 side
Vertical angle
GPT-3202N/NW : 2 sides
GPT-3203N/NW, 3205N/NW, 3207N/NW : 1 side

Minimum reading
GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW : 5" / 1" (1mgon / 0.2mgon) reading
GPT-3207N/NW : 10" / 5" (2mgon / 1mgon) reading
Accuracy (Standard deviation based on DIN 18723 )
GPT-3202N/NW : 2"(0.6mgon )
GPT-3203N/NW : 3"(1mgon )
GPT-3205N/NW : 5"(1.5mgon )
GPT-3207N/NW : 7"(2mgon )
Measuring time : Less than 0.3 sec.
Diameter of circle : 71mm

Tilt Correction (Automatic index)

Tilt sensor
GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW : Automatic vertical and horizontal compensator
GPT-3207N/NW : Automatic vertical compensator

Method : Liquid type

Compensating Range : ±3'
Correction unit : 1" (0.1mgon)

25-2
 25 SPECIFICATIONS

Bluetooth® Unit(Only for built-in Bluetooth model)

Bluetooth® Standard : Bluetooth® Specification v1.2
Bluetooth® profiles : Generic Access Profile
Service Discovery Application Profile
Serial Port Profile
BD Address : IEEE std 802 48bit LAN MAC Address
Bluetooth® PASSKEY ( PIN ) : Disable to set( Default: “1111” ASCII )
Bluetooth® Transmitting : Output Class2
Bluetooth® Communication distance : About 5m
(The range will be different by a condition)
QDID : B010518

Others
Instrument height : 176mm (6.93in) Base unit detachable
(Height from the tribrach dish to the center of
telescope)

Level sensitivity
Circular level : 10'/2mm
Plate level
GPT-3202N/NW, 3203N/NW, 3205N/NW : 30"/2 mm
GPT-3207N/NW : 40"/2 mm

Optical Plummet Telescope

Magnification : 3×
Focusing range : 0.5m to infinity
Image : Erect
Field of view : 5°(ø114mm/1.3m)

Laser pointer
Light source : LD (Visible laser)
Wave length : 690nm
Out put : 1mW maximum
Laser class : Class 2(IEC Publication 60825-1)
: Class II(FDA/BHR 21 CFR 1040)

Laser Plummet (Only for Laser plummet type)

Light source : LD (Visible laser)
Wave length : 633nm
Out put : 1mW maximum
Laser class : Class 2(IEC Publication 60825-1)
: Class II(FDA/BHR 21 CFR 1040)

Dimension : 336(H)×184(W)×172(L) mm
(13.2(H)×7.2(W)×6.8(L) in)

Weight
Instrument
(with battery) : 5.3kg (11.6 lbs)
(without battery) : 5.0kg (11.0 lbs)
Plastic carrying case : 3.4kg (7.5 lbs)
(Weight of the carrying case may be slightly different
due to specific market.)

Durability
Protection against water and dust : IP66 (with BT-52QA)
(Based on the standard IEC60529)
Ambient Temperature Range : –20°C to +50°C (–4°F to +122°F)

External Battery
Input voltage : DC7.0-9.8 V

25-3
 25 SPECIFICATIONS

Battery BT-52QA (This battery does not contain mercury.)

Out put voltage : 7.2 V
Capacity : 2,700 mAh (Ni-MH)
Number of cells : 6
Weight : 0.3kg (0.7 lbs)
Maximum operating time (when fully recharged) at +20°C (+68°F)
Select Bluetooth® Port (Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
Including distance measurement : Approx. 4.2hours
Angle measurement only : Approx. 25hours
Select RS-232C Port
Including distance measurement : Approx. 5.0hours
Angle measurement only : Approx. 45hours

Battery Charger BC-27M

Input voltage : 100-240V~
In North America, use only 120V ~.
Frequency : 50/60Hz
Recharging time (at +20°C /+68°F)
Battery BT-52QA : Approx. 1.8 hours
Discharging time (at +20°C /+68°F)
Battery BT-52QA : 9 hours (in case of full charge)
Operating temperature : +10°C to +40°C (+50°F to +104°F)
Charging signal : Red lamp illumination
Refreshing signal : Yellow lamp illumination
Finishing signal : Green lamp illumination
Abnormal signal : Red blinking
or
[ Red ON -> Orange ON -> OFF] (The pattern repeats.)
Weight : 0.3kg (0.6 lbs)

z Battery using time will vary depending on environmental conditions and operations done with
GPT-3200N/NW series.

25-4
APPENDIX
1 Dual Axis Compensation
Inclination of the vertical axis with respect to true vertical will result in incorrectly measured horizontal
angles. The extent of the error in horizontal angle measurement due to axis tilt depends on three
factors :

z the amount of the tilt of axis

z the elevation of the target
z the horizontal angle between the direction of till of the vertical axis and the target.

These factors are related by the following formula :

Hzerr = v•sinα • tanh

where v = tilt of axis in arcseconds

α = azimuth angle between vert. axis direction and target
h = elevation of target
Hzerr = error in horizontal angle

Example: When the vertical axis is tilted by 30 arcseconds, the target is 10° above the horizon and
rotated 90 in azimuth from the direction of the vertical axis error.

Hzerr = 30" • sinα • tan10°

Hzerr = 30" • 1 • 0 .176326=5.29"

From the above example it can be seen that horizontal angle errors will increase with steeper vertical
sights (tangent will increase as vertical angle increases) and will be at a maximum when the target is at
right angles (sin 90°=1) to the direction of the vertical axis error. Errors will be at a minimum when the
sights are nearly horizontal (h=0, tan0=0) and in the same direction as the vertical axis error (α =0,
sin0=0). Please refer to the table below to see the relationship between axis tilt (v) and elevation (h)
and the error in horizontal angles which results from these factors.

h 0° 1° 5° 10° 30° 45°

v

0" 0" 0" 0" 0" 0" 0"

5" 0" 0.09" 0.44" 0.88" 2.89" 5"

10" 0" 0.17" 0.87" 1.76" 5.77" 10"

15” 0" 0.26" 1.31" 2.64" 8.66" 15"

30" 0" 0.52" 2.62" 5.29" 17.32" 30"

1' 0" 1.05" 5.25" 10.58" 34.64" 1'

APPENDIX-1
It is clear from the table that dual axis compensation has the most benefit when the elevation
of the target is greater then 30° and the axis is tilted more than 10". The entries indicated in
bold in the table show, in fact, that for many common surveying applications i.e. target
elevation <30° and axis error <10", virtually no correction would be required. Dual axis
compensation is especially suited then for applications where the sights are very steep.

Even though the compensators can correct horizontal angles for vertical axis errors,
it is still important to use care in setting up the instrument.
Centering error, for instance, cannot be corrected by the compensators. If the vertical axis is
tilted by 1’ with the instrument 1.4meters above the ground, a centering error of approx. 0.4mm
will result. The maximum effect of this error at 10m is about 8" of horizontal angle error.

In order to maintain the increased accuracy possible through dual axis compensation, it is
necessary to keep the compensators in proper adjustment.The compensators must agree with
the actual level condition of the instrument. Through various environmental stresses, the
agreement between the level condition sensed by the compensators and the true level condition
of the instrument may be disturbed. In order to reestablish the correct relationship between the
compensator and the true level condition of the instrument, it is necessary to carry out the
vertical indexing procedure listed on see Chapter 17.3.7 “Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum”.
This adjustment will both reset the vertical index (cause a direct + indirect zenith reading to the
same elevation to equal 360°) and zero the level reference for the horizontal compensator.
While correct vertical angles can be obtained by averaging direct and indirect reading even
when the index is improperly adjusted, the same is not true for horizontal angles. Since the
vertical axis error is fixed for a given setup, its effect cannot be removed by averaging two
readings.
For this reason, it is extremely important to maintain the vertical indexing
adjustment to insure proper correction of the horizontal angles.

APPENDIX-2
2 Precaution when Charging or Storing Batteries
The capacity of battery will be affected and its service life shortened in any of the following cases while
it is recharged, discharged or stored.
1) Recharging
Fig. 1 shows how ambient temperature at recharging is related to charging efficiency or as affecting
discharge capacity. As seen from the figure, charging at normal temperature is best, and the
efficiency decreases as the temperature rises. It is best, therefore, to always recharge the battery at
normal temperature to obtain full use of battery capacity and enjoy maximum operation per charge.
And the service life of your battery will be shortened if it is frequently overcharged or recharged at
high temperature.

Note: 0.1C charge means that the battery is recharged with 0.1 -time current as against its
capacity.

2) Discharge
Fig. 2 shows discharge temperature characteristics. Discharge characteristics at high temperature
are the same as those at normal temperatures. The battery is likely to have reduced discharge
capacity as well as lower discharged voltage when discharged at low temperature. And the service
life of your battery will be shortened if it is greatly overcharged.

Note: 1C discharge means one with 1 -time current over battery capacity.

3) Storage
See Fig. 3 for how storing period at different temperature levels is related to the remaining capacity.
The battery will lose its capacity as storage temperature rises and the storage period increases.
This does not mean, however , that the battery performance is damaged when the battery is stored.
The battery, reduced in capacity, will be restored once it is recharged. Always recharge your battery
before use. And recharge and discharge the battery 3 or 4 times to restore its capacity if it has been
stored for a long period or at high temperature. Storing at high temperature can adversely affect the
service life of your battery.
Your battery has been fully charged before leaving the factory, but its capacity may be affected
considerably when it takes several months to reach you, if it is stored at high temperature area or
passes through a high-temperature region. Then, the battery must be recharged and discharged
3~4 times to fully restore its capacity.
And the battery should always be stored at normal temperature or lower if it will not be used for any
long period. This helps your battery have a longer service life.

APPENDIX-3
 120

Charging efficiency (discharge capacity(%))

100

0.1C charge
80

60

Discharge : 0.2, E.V.=1.0V

40 Temperature at

20

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Fig.1 Recharging

APPENDIX-4
Bluetooth® and the Bluetooth® logos are trademarks owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc., and licensed to Topcon
Corporation.

©2010 TOPCON CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Utilizing recycled paper
 http://www.topcon.co.jp
Please see the attached address list or the following website for contact addresses.
GLOBAL GATEWAY http://global.topcon.com/